Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. A type can be a specific size of a family. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. A type can also be a style. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the user interface is labeled. specifically its clear user interface. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use.Type: Each family can have several types. such as a 30” X 42” title block. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. This creates a new project based on the default template. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). In the steps that follow. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. In the following illustration. making it easy to understand what each button represents. click . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 .

the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Edit. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. and View. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. In addition.By default. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . TIP For example. You then click the command name to run the command. While working in the drawing area. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. click Toolbar. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. 9 In the Type Selector. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. notice a beam type is specified. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. On the left side of the Options Bar. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. Within the drawing area. click Design Bars. First. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. click Structural Column. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. If you select the Beam tool. click Structural Wall.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. if you intend to add a beam. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. 6 On the Design Bar. click Beam. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. notice the list of columns that are available. For example.

11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. immediately below the Type Selector. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . containing buttons grouped by function. click the tab. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar.

In the Project Browser. select Views (all).The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 .

The browser is also dockable. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . delete.sign next to the name. and rename views. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 14 On the Settings menu. family category (beams. click Browser Organization. schedules. reports. families. and groups of your current project. To open a view. 3D). double-click the name. and groups. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. elevations. columns. walls).You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. and group name. You can right-click in the browser to add. sheets. 13 In the Type Selector.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. In the bottom left corner of the window. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Modify. In this case. Do not click. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Cancel. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . After you create a browser organization scheme.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 18 On the Design Bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar.

The Status Bar also provides information. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. press F1 to get help on that dialog. Windows: From any window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. Tooltips: To see tooltips. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. In the Status Bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. If there is no Help button displayed. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. You can use this tri-pane. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. click . it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Click the Help button. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. There are several tools that help you find information. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. regarding selected components within a view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. in conjunction with tooltips. 20 Press TAB. press SHIFT+F1. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. find a keyword on the Index tab. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. When you place the cursor over a component. After you are familiar with these tasks.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. and click to get the topic associated with the window. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons.

rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the tutorials. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. For example. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps. the view zooms out from the structural model. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 .

and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 8 Click in the drawing area. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. If you do not have a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.6 On the View toolbar. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 18 On the Undo menu. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click Help.11 To display SteeringWheels. and click the SteeringWheels tab. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. moving the wheel to the desired location. 16 To exit the wheel. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. As you move the mouse. . 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. on the View toolbar. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). and then using the Zoom tool again. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. select the second item in the list. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Move. click Settings menu ➤ Options. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . In this example.

click Modify. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and click again to end it. on the Standard toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. such as the Lines command. click Lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. Some commands. On the Design Bar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. 21 To end the command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. beams. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. beam systems. columns. and a concrete slab to the model. You then add structural walls. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. 19 . using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. you create a 5-story steel structure. Finally. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. Structural Modelling In this lesson. you will create and name a new steel project. When you finish these tutorials. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality.

click OK. ■ ■ In the drawing area. 4 In the New Project dialog. enter 12' 0". click the Level 2 reference line. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and double-click North. click to create Level 3. Adding New Levels In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER.rte. you create additional levels for your structure. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Level. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. Adding New Levels on page 20. 3 In the Choose Template dialog.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). On the Options Bar. open the Imperial Templates folder. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. when a dashed line displays. enter 12' 0". 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Analysis-Default .rvt. click Browse. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Open. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. 5 Press ESC. each with the offset value set to 12' 0". Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and Level 5). 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4.

rvt. Notice that Level 2 is bold. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. click symbol as shown. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. Click Open.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. (Zoom In). Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. select Black and White. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Select Current view only. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. select Auto .Center to Center. For Colors. For Positioning. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .dwg. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click Training Files. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2.

9 In the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing.5 Click the elevation symbol. click drawing. drag it beyond the dimensions. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. click Query. select a single column. and in the Import Instance Query dialog. and on the Options Bar. . and click to place the symbol. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . click Hide in View.

(Undo). click Grid. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that all columns disappear. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. Notice that it is labeled 2. 10 On the Toolbar. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 3 On the Options Bar. click . Adding Column Grids In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. Adding Column Grids on page 24.

the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Column Grids | 25 . and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. enter A. labels display in numerical sequence. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. click Modify. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. NOTE When you select a grid line. As you select subsequent grid lines. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. click Grid.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. and press ENTER. 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. click . Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. 10 On the Options Bar.

The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. 19 Enter ZF. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. Click Apply. and then OK. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. Under Halftone. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . The last grid line is labeled G. click Modify.dwg file.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A.

For the remainder of this tutorial. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. this view is referred to as the plan view. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure.

For the remainder of this tutorial. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . select Finish Face: Exterior. . and enter ZF.8" Masonry. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. and place the first structural wall as shown. click Structural Wall. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. this view is referred to as the 3D view. 8 In the Type Selector. click center of the drawing. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. select Basic Wall : Generic .2 On the View toolbar. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. and for Loc Line. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. click (3D). 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. 6 On the View toolbar.

13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.12 Using the same method. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft.

Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding Structural Walls | 31 .19 On the Toolbar. (Mirror). click 20 Click grid D. The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side.

you add columns at specific grid intersections.21 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adding Structural Columns on page 32. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2.

place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. i_RST_EW_Modelling. .Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. click Structural Column. 4 In the Type Selector. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. 2 On the View toolbar. click structure. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. 6 Using the same method.

14 Click inside the 3D view. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF. 10 In the Type Selector. click (Grid Intersection). and enter ZF. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Structural Column. 13 On the Toolbar. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view.7 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43.

click Beam. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 2 On the View toolbar. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . 4 In the Type Selector. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click Chain.rvt. click structure.

36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click the column at grid location A6. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. and A6. and select the beam between A6 and A5. press CTRL. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. 8 Using the same method. A5. enter 5' 0". and press ENTER. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. that is. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed.

click .Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 14 In the Type Selector. click . and enter ZF. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. This project does not require sloped beams. 11 On the Toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar.

and enter ZF. click Modify. 20 Click inside the plan view. 18 Click inside the 3D view. and press DELETE. 21 On the View toolbar. Beams are placed within the grid. 19 On the Design Bar. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. click through A5.17 On the Options Bar. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish. . Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam.

27 In the Type Selector. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. click Beam. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. Adding Structural Beams | 39 .23 Using the same method. 25 On the View toolbar. between grid lines G2 and G5. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. click . 24 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.

30 Using the same method. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.

and press DELETE. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. 34 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 41 . 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. and on the Toolbar. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. click . click . 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection.31 Select the 3 new beams.

and enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. 38 Click inside the 3D view. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and press DELETE. click .36 On the View toolbar. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2.

click center of the structure. This is the endpoint for the first beam. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This is the startpoint for the first beam. click Beam. 40 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . . 42 In the Type Selector.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. 39 Click inside the plan view.

Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. click Modify. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. and on the Toolbar. This is the endpoint for the third beam. click . Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . This is the endpoint for the second beam.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 46 On the Design Bar. 48 Click the beam on grid line D .

Adding Structural Beams | 45 . 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.

under Constraints. Under Category. enter -0' 5". do the following: For z-Direction Justification. Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. Click OK. do the following: Click Check None. select Other. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click Apply. Under Category. select Structural Framing (Girder). 55 On the Options Bar. For z-Direction Offset Value. 54 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. select Structural Framing (Joist). and then click OK.53 On the Options Bar.

Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. For Maximum Spacing. select 3D. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. For Beam Type. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view.rvt. and enter ZF. . 5 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. enter 9' 0". select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Under Pattern. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. click of the structure. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 .57 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Layout Rule. select Maximum Spacing. click Beam System.

9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. 8 Using the same settings and method. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. and enter ZF. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 7 Click to place the beam system. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. click Modify. Also. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure.

Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Lines. and enter ZF. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. You are now in sketch mode.rvt. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. click Slab. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling.

and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . zoom in and out as needed. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. When sketching the slab. If necessary. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. . click structure.4 On the View toolbar.

Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . click . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. 11 On the Toolbar. 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines.

click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 14 Enter ZF. . and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click Lines. click line D.13 On the Design Bar.

. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click Lines. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 21 Enter ZF. 22 On the View toolbar. click Lines. 23 On the Design Bar. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . . 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. click grid line D.

28 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF.25 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click structure. . 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Enter ZF. 27 On the View toolbar. click Lines.

i_RST_EW_Modelling. beam systems. beams. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 .In the Revit dialog. Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55.rvt. you copy columns. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure.

Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. select Up to level: Level 5. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. select Walls. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. 4 In the Filter dialog. under Constraints. 5 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . and enter ZF. do the following: Click Check None. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Under Category. do the following: For Top Constraint. Click Apply.

and draw a selection box around the entire view. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. do the following: Click Check None. and then click OK. Click Apply. under Constraints. do the following: For Top Level. select Level 3. . For Top Offset. 9 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. select Structural Columns. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . Under Category. enter 4' 0". 8 On the Options Bar. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. select Level 5. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 10 On the Options Bar.

click ■ ■ ■ . Structural Framing (Girder). click ■ ■ . 19 On the Options Bar. select Level 3 and Level 5. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. Structural Beam Systems. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. do the following: Click Check None. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. Click Apply. 17 On the Design Bar. For Top Offset. click Modify. 20 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. enter 4' 0". select Floors. and Structural Framing (Joist). do the following: For Base Offset. enter 0' 0'. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and then click OK. while pressing CTRL. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. Under Category. Click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Foundations | 59 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. Adding Foundations on page 59. 2 Enter ZF. Adding Foundations In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 1.rvt. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column.

click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click . 7 On the Toolbar. click (Structural Column). click Modify.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". 5 On the Options Bar. All the structural columns are highlighted. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. click Finish.

and click OK. and press DELETE. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Type. select 12" Foundation Slab. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. (3D). click Foundation ➤ Slab. Adding Foundations | 61 . 14 On the Design Bar. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. You are now in sketch mode. 18 On the View toolbar. click (Rectangle). click Floor Properties.10 Select both footings. click 19 Enter ZF. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. 17 On the Design Bar.

You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Structural Detailing on page 62. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. Structural Detailing In this lesson. Finally. you place it in an existing project sheet. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. and modify its line properties. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. Next. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial.

click Training Files. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. but do not open it. ■ Click Save As. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. click Training Files. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.rvt.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.dwg.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. Click OK.

■ ■ For Colors. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial.Center to Center. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . For Positioning. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Auto . select Black and White. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. ■ Click Open. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference.rvt.

rvt. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . i_RST_EW_Detailing. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. click . you create a section that references an existing detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. Notice that Level 1 is bold. Select the Reference other view option. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. 4 On the Options Bar. Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4" = 1'-0".

i_RST_EW_Detailing. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). move the cursor down.Unnamed. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. and click inside the north wall to place the section.rvt. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. expand select Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and double-click S.1. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Level 1 on the sheet. 4 On the View toolbar. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. 6 Release the mouse button.Sheet S-1 .Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).

7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.Notice the detail drawing outline. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 Click to place the detail.

click corner of the sheet. change it to S-1. and click ENTER.In the structural plan view of Level 1.0. . Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number.

you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number.In the structural plan view of Level 1.rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.

click . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click on the detail drawing. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and double-click Typical Wall Section. 3 On the Options Bar.

select 4.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. notice the Layer value CONT5. 9 Click the CONT5 row. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 13 Click Apply. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 Click OK. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 12 Click OK. for Weight. 14 Click OK.

rvt. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 3 In the Insert Views dialog.rvt.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 .TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. click Training Files. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . select Show all views and sheets.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 .Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 7 Click OK. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag 001 . Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. 9 Release the mouse button. 11 Click to place the detail.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. click OK. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. and close all other views. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. double-click Level 3 . you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan.S. click .T.O.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. 2 On the View toolbar.. i_RST_EW_Detailing.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. click Detail Component. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. as shown. 20 In the Type Selector.

26 On the Toolbar. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. Adding Detail Components | 93 .24 Click to place the bolt. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click Modify. click (Move).

as shown.28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 31 In the Type Selector.

34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. as shown. 35 Select the L-angle. click 38 Click OK. Adding Detail Components | 97 . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. click Modify.33 Click to place the L-angle. and then click the lock for the alignment. 36 On the Options Bar. .

98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . i_RST_EW_Detailing. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise.rvt.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view.

The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. 8 Click to place the break line. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . as shown.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. to the right of the coping detail. select Break Line. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. as shown. 5 Click to place the break line. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. below the structural angle and expansion bolt.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click to place the break line. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise.

18 Click in the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. away from the text box. click Text.15 On the View Control Bar. Move the cursor to the right. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). as shown. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . Move the cursor up and to the right. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. Click to finish the first leader segment. and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab.

as shown. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click to finish the first leader segment. click (Add Left Leader). click Modify.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. Move the cursor to the right. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). Click to finish the second leader segment. 22 Click on the leader.

24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. as shown. 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 .

INFO). Move the cursor down and to the right. (One Segment). ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. SECTIONS FOR REINF. away from the text box. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. click 32 On the Options Bar.C. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right. Click to finish the leader segment.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click in the drawing area. EXPANSION ANCHORS. Click to finish the second leader segment. as shown. click Text. click Text. 28 Click in the drawing area. away from the text box. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Move the cursor to the left. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. 31 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. 27 On the Options Bar.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 .

106 .

you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. Finally. 107 . 7 In the New Project dialog. In the first lesson. Notice that the drawing area is black. and click OK. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. click OK. select Invert background color. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. click Browse. you create an office template. 4 In the Options dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 9 In the New Project dialog. they are not saved to project or template files. selection default options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects.rte. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. which is independent of the project settings. 5 Under Colors. notification preferences. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. and your username when using worksets. journal cleanup options. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and set it as your default template. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 12 Under Colors. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . the elements causing the error display using this color. 20 On the Design Bar. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. 13 In the Color dialog. click Modify. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. click Structural Wall. 11 In the Options dialog. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 15 Under Notifications. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click the value for Selection Color. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. click Modify. and select the wall. click Training Files. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 14 Click the General tab. 16 Click OK. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. When an error occurs. and click OK. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. select None. click No. 24 When prompted to save. select One hour.rvt. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select yellow. select One hour. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Tooltip Assistance. click the Graphics tab.

Under Windows Username. 28 In the Options dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. as well as the material and rendering libraries. and the family template files. click Browse. 2 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations on page 109. clear Invert background color. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations | 109 . These files are used primarily in the software support process. Under Journal File Cleanup. TIP To view a template. click Browse. 7 In the Options dialog. you specify your default file locations. 5 Under Default path for user files. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. For Selection Color. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. the family libraries. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. and click Open. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. 3 Under Default template file. 4 Click Cancel. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. you can start a new project with that template. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click the File Locations tab. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. under Default path for family template files. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. do not save the changes. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. If prompted. select Red. and click Browse to select a template. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. Your login name displays by default.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. NOTE When you are opening. click Place. and click on the right-side of the field. click (Add Value). saving. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path. such as in a large. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and change the name to My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. and you can create new libraries.This path is set automatically during the installation process. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. centralized. However. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the following illustration. 10 Under Libraries. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 8 Click Cancel. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. or loading a Revit Structure file. and notice the list of library names.

Save. 14 Under Library Name. or families. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. 21 Under Libraries. click the My Library icon. Specifying File Locations | 111 . Load. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 20 Click the File Locations tab. and select it as the library path. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. If you work in a large office. and click Open. select My Library. 18 Click Cancel. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. templates. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click My Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. and click OK. and Import dialogs. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path.

3 Under Settings. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Under Settings.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. click Modify. click OK. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 22 In the text editor. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Spelling tab. click Edit. click Restore Defaults. If prompted. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 9 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down the list of building industry terms. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. 23 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. click OK. do not save the changes. 11 In the Options dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click template. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click the Spelling tab. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Text. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Click File menu ➤ Exit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 17 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter sheetmtl-Cu.

After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Template file.rte. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. you modify snap increments. click OK.. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. click Training Files. click Structural Wall. You can turn snap settings on and off. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and enter 1. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . For example. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. work with snapping turned off. click OK. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Browse. In this exercise. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

If it does not. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. and click Wall. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. click Modify. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. use the wheel button on your mouse.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom out until it does so. If you do not have a wheel button. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. This is the increment that you added previously. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Do not set the wall end point. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that snapping is once again active. While sketching.

18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. click Training Files. 20 Move the cursor downward.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. fill patterns. When you apply a material to a component. 2 Scroll down. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Finally. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. the midpoint.rvt. and specify the wall endpoint. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. annotations. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and select Concrete . In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will snap to the endpoints.Precast Concrete for Name. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and use it to complete the exercises. and delete the value 1". 3 Click (Duplicate). and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.. When a model component is loaded into a project. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. If you move the cursor along the wall. and do not save the file. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and object styles. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. 17 Enter SM. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. You create and modify materials. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. save the project file with a unique name. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. lines. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. 23 Click OK. Using these options. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges.

18 On the Design Bar.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click . 6 Select the lower exterior wall. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 17 In the Type Selector. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 15 Select the left foundation wall. 12 On the right side of the Material field. and click OK. select Concrete-Precast for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. In the steps that follow.O. 16 Press CTRL. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. 10 In the Value field for Structure. 8 Click Duplicate. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom.Custom for the new wall name. and click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. enter Concrete . Wall. and double-click T. and click OK. click Edit/New. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. click This is the material you created previously. and select the remaining exterior walls. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. Fnd. . You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. 9 Enter Foundation . 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click OK 3 times. click Modify. click Edit.Precast. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 13 In the Materials dialog.

zoom into the model. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. the material that you created is displayed. In the following exercise. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. The rendering process begins. 22 In the Rendering dialog. click . NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail.19 On the View Toolbar. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 21 In the drawing area. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . select Best. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. When it is finished. click Rendering dialog. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. and select Rendering. Click Render.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Pattern Type. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 24 Close the Rendering dialog.23 On the Rendering dialog. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. such as steel. 7 Under Custom. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available.rvt. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. expand Elevations. under Display. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. rotate. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Drafting pattern density is fixed. i_Settings-in progress. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and move model patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 5 Click New. choose Model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Custom. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. click Show Model. click Import. You can align. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. and double-click West.

22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. 24 Click OK 3 times. select Model. and click Open. 14 Select the wall. 25 On the Design Bar.pat from the Common folder. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 10 Under Custom. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation.TIP Typically. click Edit/New. and click OK. adjust your zoom settings as needed. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. click . click . select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. TIP If the pattern does not display. click . The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. click Edit. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Pattern Type. click Modify. and click OK. to select a fill pattern. 26 On the View Toolbar. . This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. click OK. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click in the Material field for Layer 2. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. 12 Click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Materials dialog. 17 In the Value field for Structure.

rvt. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. and double-click 3D. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. 2 On the keyboard. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. i_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. there are often multiple trusses within a project. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. expand 3D Views. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

3 On the View Control Bar. click Show categories from all disciplines. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. double-click the Line Color field. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 Under Category. click OK. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. expand Walls. select Blue. 7 Under the Walls category. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Custom Colors. 8 In the Color dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.

8 On the View Control Bar. enter Truss for Name. under Floor Plans. expand Structural Framing. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view.rvt. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. and select Web Joist. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser.O.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. double-click T. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. (example: plan view). click New. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. and click Hidden Line. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . i_Settings-in progress. Fnd. You have created a new line pattern. Under Line Pattern. now you must apply it. select Truss. Wall. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. and select Web Joist for Visibility. 15 Click OK twice. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . Select Truss for Line Pattern. Select Blue for Line Color.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Structural Framing. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view.

and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. . click New. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. Slab.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. under Modify Subcategories. double-click T. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. click Lines. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Select Red for Line Color. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Options Bar. Click OK. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. select Underslab Drainage. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click . and click to set the rectangle endpoint. equally spaced as shown below.O. 23 In the Options Bar.

27 On the View Toolbar. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Annotations | 125 . and click OK. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. double-click Level 1. 29 On the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 30 Click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. click . Modifying Annotations on page 125.Imperial for name. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. under Floor Plans. click the default value for Units Format. and clear Underslab Drainage. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. expand Lines. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. and clear Underslab Drainage. 5 Under Text. 33 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Enter Linear . i_Settings-in progress. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 34 Click OK. expand Lines. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

In the Type Selector.Imperial dimension available. 18 Click a beam. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. 15 Under Loaded Tags. click Modify. under Floor Plans. the other displays the instance value. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 19 On the Design Bar.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click Dimension. verify that Create is clear. and click OK. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Structural Framing Tag. notice that there is a Linear . Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. Under Category. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Click OK. . 7 Click OK twice. double-click T. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser.O.rfa. 12 Click Load. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Tag All Not Tagged. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Wall. 21 Under Leader. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Fnd. 22 On the View Toolbar. Structural Framing Tag. 14 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. You have created a new dimension style.

select 0 decimal places for Rounding. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 6 Click OK. and click OK. In this table. select Openings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Specifying Units of Measurement. and Detail Level Options on page 127. Specifying Units of Measurement. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click . When you create a new view and specify its view scale. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog.Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurement . Specifying Units of Measurement. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.Temporary Dimensions. In the second section. you modify the detail level assignments.24 Proceed to the next exercise. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and Detail Level Options | 127 . Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. Unless there is an override.unless there is an override. i_Settings-in progress. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. In the first section. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 3 In the Format dialog. click the default value for Format. Temporary Dimensions. under Length. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. 8 Under Walls. dimensions use these project settings. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the final section. under Area. 5 In the Format dialog. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. click the default value for Format. and click OK. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. 12 Click OK. select SF for Unit suffix. and click OK. You do not select a view scale to move it. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. dimension values display using this setting. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.rvt. In this project.

you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. and double-click Completed Project. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.rvt. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. In this exercise. expand Sheets (all). NOTE In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Project_Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 2 In the Project Browser. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .

click the Folders tab. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 5 On the Views tab. and click OK. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 21 In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each view type. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. 14 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. under Sheets. notice that views are grouped based on phase.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. under Views. In the Project Browser. select Discipline. and click OK. and click OK. 8 Select Phase. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. On the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click New.

You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. When you create a new template based on an existing template. and view names. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. When you create new projects. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. you select the starting point for your structural template. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. For example. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and rendered scenes in a template. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. the same rules apply. and double-click Building Elevation. You can also save these settings in a template file. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 5 Click OK. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. named print settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you create an office template. such as structural or construction. Other than the default template. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. and click OK. If your work requires a variety of templates. If you want to save this file. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. In the lesson that follows. Type. and Discipline. click Browse. navigate to your preferred directory. when you create a new project. and click Open. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. preloaded families. Depending on your needs. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. enter a unique file name. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. select Project for Create new. dimensions styles. Whenever you create a new project or template. 4 In the New Project dialog. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template.rte template. levels. In this lesson. expand Views ➤ Elevations. 2 Under Template File. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template.

you modify the project settings for your new template. 11 Under Template File. If you have additional projects open. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. In this exercise. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. Other templates. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 13 Click Open. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. in the drawing area. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. click Browse. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Select a default template. select Project Template. 14 Under Create New. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. close them. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. such as the structural template. For example. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you can select it now. When you create the material. drag a zoom region around the level heads. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . and click OK. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. weights. If you want to use a template other than the default.

You can align. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. line patterns. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . create new subcategories. 13 Modify categories. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. one for perspective model line styles. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. and create new subcategories as needed. 11 If necessary. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You can add and delete view scales. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. or modify existing patterns. or refer to the Help documentation. 7 Click OK when finished. and move model patterns. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. In the dialog. create and modify them as needed. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. you can set line weights. see the previous lesson. rotate. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Modifying System Settings on page 107. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. and scroll through the list of categories. For more details on modifying these settings. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. specific modifications are not dictated. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. Observe the materials that are already defined.During this exercise. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. 2 Scroll down the Name list. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. line colors. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. In the Object Styles dialog. such as beams and columns in orthographic views.

click Duplicate. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. and dimensions. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 26 To modify a line pattern. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. name the style. 32 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. tags. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. 31 If necessary. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. modify the line weight. select it from this list. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 38 Click OK. 30 For existing line categories. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. angular. 28 Click OK. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. line color. and radial dimensions are modified separately. select it. and specify the properties. To see the details of a particular style. select it from this list. and specify the properties. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. name the style. 23 Click OK. Linear. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and click Edit. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. or line pattern as needed. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. click Duplicate.

specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. TIP In the drawing area. Medium. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. 51 Under Length. In the Tags dialog. and move view scales as needed. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. For example. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 55 Specify the Slope option. 48 To load new annotation tags. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 58 Under Walls. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. When you create a new view. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 60 Click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 56 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. or Fine. click Format. 59 Under Doors and Windows. Using the arrows between the columns. The detail level is based on view scale.44 Click OK. and choose a decimal symbol. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. and click OK. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Volume. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 53 Click OK. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 62 Review the table. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. and Angle settings. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. click Load.

click the Views tab. 66 Delete. 68 Click the Sheets tab. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. In a typical project. 69 Delete. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). In certain projects. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. 70 If necessary. Rename. click View Direction. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. For example. or from the roof looking down (down direction). click Edit/New. create new browser organization types. To move the view scales. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. or Edit existing organization types. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. or Edit existing organization types. 63 Click OK. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. click the arrows between columns. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Rename. and select Properties. create new browser organization types. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 If necessary. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 71 Click OK. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

and make modifications in each area as necessary. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Use the table below as a checklist. You can find additional information in Help. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. However. In such a case. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. If necessary. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and framing tags. Links to associated tutorials are provided. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. For example. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.

you do both. In addition. click on the Options Bar. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. modify. 3 To modify. For example. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. titleblocks. Obviously. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. do so before starting this exercise. Although the options are endless. Make modifications. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Depending on the intended use of this template. and click OK. Although this is possible. select Edit/New. However. and click OK. if you loaded every beam type you could find. In the Element Properties dialog. and beams. brace symbols. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. select Edit/New. or add to this selection. If necessary. If you have not completed the previous exercise. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. you could load detail components. there are some important thoughts to consider. In the steps that follow. select Load. create. Modify type properties. If this selection is satisfactory. In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the Type Selector. you can move onto the next component type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you may want to delete. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Click Duplicate. and column symbols. click Beam.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. select it. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. or load a new beam type. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. You can load any family or group into a template. enter a name. For example. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and click OK. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. and click Open.

Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Load. This titleblock is currently part of the template. right-click the component. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. and click Delete. load. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Preview. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.) 9 Expand the titleblock. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Press ESC twice to return to the template.4 Click OK. 12 Click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Notice that each family category is listed. and select the titleblock type. To do so. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. 11 To load a titleblock. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. create. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. expand Families. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load.

Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . 3 Specify each value as needed. select Structural Framing Plan. and make modifications. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. and select Apply View Template. In this exercise. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. rename or duplicate the view template. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 6 Click OK. In addition. 2 For Name. In this exercise. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. Discipline. select the view. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. right-click. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 4 If necessary. you save time and increase consistency. you will first modify view templates. you created new projects using different templates. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create the views required for your template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and double-click Level 1. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. Detail Level. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. At any time. you can apply a view template to any view. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. View Range.

140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. right-click {3D}. 21 In the Options Bar. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. duplicate. If necessary.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. if desired. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. or delete them as needed. or delete this view. and apply the appropriate template. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. 18 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and select Rename. right-click Level 1. review the existing floor plans. and click OK. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. Black levels have no associated views. review the Structural plans and elevations. expand 3D Views. click 26 In the Project Browser. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. double-click Building Elevation. on the View toolbar. To do so. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. 15 If you modified any other view templates. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 24 Create additional levels as needed. 12 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. open the view from the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ View Properties. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 19 In the Project Browser. You can also duplicate or delete the view. under Structural Plans. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. duplicate. under Floor Plans. select the view in the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. You can rename this view. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. 20 To add additional levels to the template. and click OK. 28 Rename the 3D View. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. click Apply. Rename. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. under Elevations. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. After the template is applied. 11 Click Apply.

click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. select and order required fields. on the View toolbar. click . You may want to add schedules to a template. Save the view 32 To save the view. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. and click OK. and click OK. Using this dialog. supply a view name. click . modify settings. assign filters. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template.29 To create additional 3D views. On the Filter tab. and modify their properties accordingly. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. select the category type. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

36 Click OK. You are prompted to select a titleblock. modify settings. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. On the Appearance tab. To do so. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. To later add a titleblock to a sheet.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 41 Create new sheets as needed. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. or on the sheet itself. and columns. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. select the titleblock and delete it. and click OK. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. select the default titleblock. select one. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. beams. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. and click Rename. and click OK. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. After the sheet is created. modify settings. and modify their properties accordingly. double-click the sheet number. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. click Sheet. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. You can still add views to the sheet. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template.

6 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. ■ 5 Click OK. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you import a DWG or DXF file.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF.3 Under General. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.txt).

name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. name the file. When you create a multi-category schedule. windows. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. For example. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. for example. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and click Save. and related multi-category tags and schedules. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. and so on. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters.txt) for MicroStation. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 5 For each category. project parameters. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. When scheduling. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog.16). Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. doors. When you save these mappings to a text file. 9 Click Save As. they become the set mappings for the project. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. They cannot be shared with other projects. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and click Save. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and unlike shared parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 8 In the dialog. click Save As.2 For each category. Using shared parameters. These settings are retained within the project template. they cannot be used to tag objects. and click Save. therefore. click Save As. name the file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. and so on. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.

11 For each parameter group. click New. 24 Click Select. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If a file already exists. click Add. 10 Click OK. 5 Enter the group name. and select Shared Parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. under Groups. select Project parameter. and click OK when finished. 16 Under Name. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. you can begin creating parameter groups. 27 Click OK. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select a shared parameter. you can create a list of parameters. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select a group to which you want to add parameters. This allows you to name the external parameter file. add required parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 18 Under Type. select a parameter value type. For each parameter group. 14 Click Add. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 23 To add a shared project parameter. and specify the Type. After the file is named. 7 Under Parameter group. Creating Named Print Settings. select a parameter discipline type. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. click New. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 17 Under Discipline. 3 Name and save the file. 8 Under Parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed.In this exercise. 21 Click OK. 25 Click OK. enter a parameter name. and click OK. 9 Name the parameter. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 2 Click Create. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs.

make minor modifications if necessary.For information on creating multi-category tags. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. For each printer. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 Under Name. paper placement. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. and add them to your default template file. and click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and print. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. you can load them into the template. The tag is now part of the template. and the percent of actual size. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. By creating named settings within the template. enter a name for the schedule. click OK. you need only select a setting. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. or consult the Help documentation. select the tag. 36 When you have completed the schedule. 34 Under Name. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. click Schedule/Quantities. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. you create named print settings.

click New. 4 Click Save As. 5 In the New dialog.3 Under Settings. click Setup. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. and create additional settings as needed. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 6 Modify the printer settings. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.

Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Click OK. 15 Name the template. Your template is complete. In this lesson. and saved them to a template. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Template Files (*. click Setup. Use the template 16 To use the template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition. and click Open. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 24 Click OK. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. If you need to share this file with others. and click Open. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. you modified settings. By investing the time to individualize your template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and save it as a template file. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 18 Select the template. you should save it to a network path. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.rte). 22 Next to Default template file. 14 Under Save as type. 23 Navigate to the template location. 17 Select Browse. You can also set this template as your default template. click Browse. loaded components. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.9 In the Print dialog. and click Save. The only remaining task is to save it. select it. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. select a different printer. 11 Click OK when finished. and create new settings for this printer.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. and Revit Architecture. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns.rvt. click Training Files. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. NOTE For training purposes. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. AutoCAD Architecture. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. click Training Files. Notice that Level 2 is bold.dwg. 149 .Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson.

and rotate the view as one object.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. stairs and elevator opening symbols. However. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 5 In the drawing area. select Auto . ■ ■ ■ For Colors. Click Open. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. select Black and White. click the imported/linked file. Exterior facade outlines. 6 On the Options toolbar. For Positioning. paste. click drawing area. copy. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view.Center to Center. drag.

Creating a Structural Model on page 161. You can save the open file if you wish. Notice that Level 2 is bold. select Export to AutoCAD. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Training Files. NOTE For training purposes. In the next tutorial. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. expand Views (all). and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. select the Imported Categories tab. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . and click OK. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. In the next tutorial. click Training Files. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. On the File menu.rvt. and select the latest available format.dwg.dwg. In the Xref Manager dialog. a new training file is supplied. and expand Structural Plans. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.

6 On the Options toolbar.Origin to Origin.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. select Auto . click the imported/linked file. click Revit Structure drawing area. Click Open. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. stairs. select Invert. For Positioning. and elevator opening symbols. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. click the Imported Categories tab. Exterior facade outlines. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 5 In the drawing area. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

10 On the View toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ . and on the Option Bar. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . 13 Select any column. and click OK.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. click .dwg. Under Constraints. click the linked file. Click OK. 12 On the Options toolbar. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. 11 In the drawing area. click Partial Explode.

5 In the Add Link dialog. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. 6 Click Open. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 2 In the New Project dialog.Notice the column adjusts to the change.Origin to Origin. select Auto . walls.rvt. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. columns. and click OK. levels. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select a template file. select Project under Create New. Notice that Level 2 is bold. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . In the next tutorial. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. You can save the open file if desired. You can copy grids. a new training file is supplied. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. for Positioning.

9 On the Options toolbar. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . stairs and elevator opening symbols. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. click Options.Exterior facade outlines. click Revit Structure drawing area. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 7 Enter ZF. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 8 In the drawing area. click the linked file.

Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. Therefore. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. 14 In the Columns dialog. Grids. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. Walls. select Split Columns by Levels. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. When finished. and while pressing CTRL. under Additional Copy Parameters. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. and Floors). under Structural Plans. To select more than one grid. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. click the Columns tab. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. select Level 2. columns need to be split at each level. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. Columns. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. make selections. Also. click Copy.

press CTRL. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. click OK. The warning can be ignored. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. After you select the grid. click Copy.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. and that the type from the new project will be used. double-click Building Elevation. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . To select more than one level. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and select each level. and that the type from the new project will be used. click OK. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project.

under Structural Plans. click Finish Mode. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. press CTRL. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and that the type from the new project will be used. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. select Level 1.After you select each level. After selecting each element. Copy structural walls. The warning can be ignored. floors. and on the Options Bar. click OK. click . 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and select each element. To select more than one element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 25 On the Design bar. click Copy. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. The warning can be ignored. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element.

The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. and click OK. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. The linked Revit file is displayed. click .27 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. select Bearing for Structural Usage. and floors. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. and on the Option Bar. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. click the Revit tab. ■ Select Overlay. click Reference Type. and click OK. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . 32 In the Manage Links dialog. check the value for Structural. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. columns. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog.

You can save the open file if you wish. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Project Coordination on page 461. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. In a later tutorial. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. In the next tutorial. Creating a Structural Model on page 161.

Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. You also learn how to splice the columns. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. and then copy this framing to other levels. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. After you copy columns. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. 161 .

and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. the imported drawing is a halftone. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar. . 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. click Training Files. 1 On the View toolbar. and enter A. click . click structural model.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. 5 Click the value in the grid head. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Grid. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise.

6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A.As you select subsequent grid lines. The last vertical grid is K. click structural model. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . Notice it is grid L. 9 On the View toolbar. Zoom in and out as needed. . change the value to J. 8 When you get to grid I. Notice it is labeled B.

click Grid. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. and enter 1 for the new value.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. The bottom grid should be grid 5. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click . 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar.

Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 . 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint.

24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown. and select the grid. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Structural Columns | 167 . and save the exercise file with a unique name.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. To save changes.rvt. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 In the Options Bar. click Structural Column. click Finish. click .Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Modelling. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. 3 In the Type Selector. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 On the Options Bar.

you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. and click Select All Instances. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and double-click South Elevation. H5. H1. 8 Select the columns listed below. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the left side of the elevation.7 Press ESC. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. and press DELETE. J1. click Modify. K5 K3. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. J2. 10 On the Options Bar. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. H2. In addition. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. Under Constraints. Click OK. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. K1 G2. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. B5. click Modify. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. which are outside of the structure footprint. K4 A5. click ■ ■ ■ . NOTE If necessary. K2 G5. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. Notice the new level is named Level 3. J5. click Level.

27 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click South Elevation. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. 29 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. double-click Level 2. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 24 In the Filter dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. The next exercise uses a new training file. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. and click OK. click Check None. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Structural Columns. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Structural Plans. select Level 3 and Level 4. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections.

and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Design Bar. Click Grid. double-click Level 2. 6 Select grid lines H and J. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip.rvt. click Finish. under Structural Plans. click Modify. Specify Girder for Usage.

21 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 and Level 4. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. click Beam. and double-click East Section . 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Specify Girder for Usage. for z-Direction Offset Value. expand 3D Views.9 On grids H and J. select Other. and click Select All Instances. and draw a girder from column to column. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ .Perspective. Under Constraints. for z-Direction Justification. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. framing the bays with girders. enter -0' 7". 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. click Modify. 20 Click OK. NOTE In the following image. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. 12 Select a column center.

5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Center. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. For Spacing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Structural Beam System Properties. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As.NOTE If necessary. 7 Click OK. For Beam Type. click Sketch. under Structural Plans. you add beam systems to Level 2. For Justification. Under Pattern. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. enter 6' 0". Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. To save changes. click Beam System. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. Adding Beam Systems | 173 .rvt. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22.

9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. In the next step you edit the beam direction. click Beam Direction. click Pick Supports. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines.

12 On the Design Bar. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . click Finish Sketch. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.

select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. Under Pattern. select the girder between J2 and J3. For Beam Type. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 14 When specifying the beam direction. click Finish Sketch. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 15 On the Design Bar. For Number of Lines. specify 2.

22 Click to place the beam system. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. Click OK. under Structural Plans. 19 On the Options Bar. click Beam System. Under Pattern. For Beam Type. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. specify 3. For Number of Lines. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. double-click Level 2. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 25 On the Design Bar. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. click Modify. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels.24 Click to place the beam system. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

30 In the Select Levels dialog. To save changes. and click Select All Instances. 31 Click OK. under 3D Views. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 32 In the Project Browser. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click East Sections . Adding a Composite Deck on page 180.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.Perspective. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . select Level 3 and Level 4. Notice the copied beam systems.

8 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Lines.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. click Floor Properties. and then sketch along the girders. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a composite deck to Level 2. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. click Training Files. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Slab. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. click Finish Sketch. 5 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck.

10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 In the Project Browser. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. click Modify.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 .Perspective. select Level 3 and Level 4. and click OK. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views. 12 In the dialog. double-click East Section . 13 On the Design Bar. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). Adding Bracing In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. click Framing Elevation.rvt. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. you add vertical bracing to a bay. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. 6 In the Type Selector.To save changes. double-click Elevation 1-a. and when it highlights. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Brace. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Bracing on page 182.

■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. NOTE If necessary. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. Adding Bracing | 183 .

double-click Level 2. under 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. under Structural Plans. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4.Perspective. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model.10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. double-click East Section . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Shear Walls on page 184.

4 In the Type Selector. specify Ground Level. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. Adding Shear Walls | 185 .3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. select Basic Wall: Exterior . TIP After sketching the walls. click Structural Wall. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file.10" Concrete. For Depth. 6 Sketch 4 walls.

The next exercise uses a new training file. TIP During selection. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . under Constraints. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 4 On the Options Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Select all 4 walls. 2 On the View toolbar. you add isolated foundations to column locations. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. click Training Files. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. under Structural Plans. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. To save changes. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 2.

the footing is placed at Ground Level. 10 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Analytical Model. In your training file. . 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. Under Analytical Model. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Click OK. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 .5 In the Filter dialog. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. NOTE In the following image. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. click Modify. Select Structural Columns. By default. double-click Ground Level. 6 On the Options Bar. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. 12 On the Design Bar. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 11 In the drawing area. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location.

click Beam. click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Level 2. bracing. In the exercises that follow. The next exercise uses a new training file. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. under 3D Views. Click Grid. and concrete wall framing. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. double-click East Section . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Perspective. Specify Girder for Usage. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise.rvt. adding horizontal framing. To save changes. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. openings. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems.13 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you complete the structural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. foundation. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click Modify. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. Add beam chains to the following locations. 6 On the Options Bar. complete the framing of this bay. 7 On the Design Bar. . click model. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually.NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. click Finish.

■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5. ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.

enter -0' 7". and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 14 On the Options Bar. Under Pattern. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . Click OK. . 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. and click Select All Instances. 20 Click to place the beam system.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click of the model. for z-Direction Justification. 13 Right-click. select the top girder. enter 3. click ■ ■ ■ . click Beam System. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. For Number of Lines. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Constraints. 17 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 3. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. For Number of Lines. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. 25 Using the sketch tool. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . trace the outline of the bay. click Beam System. 24 On the Options Bar. click Sketch. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 On the Options Bar. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

ignore it. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 . If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close.

The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . beam systems have been added to all bays. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click model.rvt. In addition. under Structural Plans. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. . Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. In this new training file. 2 On the View toolbar.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. Lastly. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. double-click Level 2.

Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. click ■ ■ ■ . enter -0' 7". for z-Direction Justification. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. Click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. select Other. click Beam.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value.

11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. click Beam. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. 10 In the Type Selector. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. or close the exercise file without saving changes. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise.8 Using the same method. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. The next exercise uses a new training file.

Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . picked. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. double-click Level 2. click Lines. and arced. Roof. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. In this training file. When sketching this deck. For Height Offset from Level. sketched.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. 5 On the Design Bar. In addition. enter -0' 2". Click OK. you can use a combination of lines including. Garage Level-1.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. click Training Files. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. 7. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. straight. click Slab. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. 6. the following new levels were added: 5. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Properties. and Foundation. 3 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans.

7 Click Finish Sketch. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. 8 On the View toolbar. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). select Chain on the Options Bar.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. 60 Enter ZF. click Modify. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.59 On the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. 65 Select the tapered roof. click Modify. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . click . Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. click (Join Geometry). 62 On the View toolbar.

you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. using the slab shape edit tools.66 In the Project Browser. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click 3D . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . under Structural Plans.Atrium. click Training Files. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 5. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing.

6 Click the center point of the slab arc. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. and is available for modification. The edge of the curved slab highlights. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. click (Draw Split Lines).3 Select the atrium curved slab.

Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line.7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click (Add New Points).

Notice that the shape edit points display.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. click Modify. 12 Select the curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the split lines. click . 11 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE.

Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. double-click 3D .Atrium.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. under 3D Views. and enter -0’ 6”. click . 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. The general shape of the curved slab displays. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. 17 On the View toolbar.

22 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. click Project to side. click . . double-click 3D . click OK. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. under Slab Shape Edit. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. under Sections (Building Sections). click section view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Atrium. double-click Section 3. 19 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 5. click Conform to Curve. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. for Curved Edge Condition. 21 Select the slab.

29 Click the center drainage point. enter SX. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. click . . 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. click 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point.27 On the Options Bar. enter SX (Snap to Point).

double-click 3D .Atrium. click Modify. under Structural Plans. Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Options Bar. click .31 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". under 3D Views. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . 34 Select the atrium curved slab. double-click Level 5.

40 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. click section view.View. 38 On the View toolbar. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 Select the slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. . you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Section 3.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sections (Building Sections). and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. or close the exercise file without saving changes. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under 3D Views. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. double-click 3D .

3 On the View Control Bar. click . and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the View toolbar. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. Adding Miter Joins | 225 . The slab is now hidden. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. click (Edit Beam Joins).

226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.

Adding Miter Joins | 227 . The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View).The miter join is complete. 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.

Notice the miter lock remains locked. 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Coarse. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Fine.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. you add a curved beam to the atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.Notice the miter lock remains locked. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. click Modify. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 4.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . 13 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file.

5 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Beam. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. select Chain. and click . 4 In the Type Selector.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

click .The beam is placed. 9 Press ESC twice. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. select the remaining curved beams. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 While pressing CTRL. 10 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns.

For Elevation. double-click Level 4. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. under Structural Plans. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. click Beam System.Atrium. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. 16 Select the floor.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. enter 6' 0". Adding Curved Beams | 233 . For Beam Type. Click OK. Scroll down to Analytical Model. and on the View Control Bar. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. select 3D. select Top. select Top of Beam. under Structural Plans. Click OK. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. Under Pattern. double-click 3D . and for Vertical Projection. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. 22 Select the bottom beam. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Maximum Spacing. enter 0' 0". click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Layout Rule. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Maximum Spacing. 20 On the Options Bar.

The beam system is placed. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium. 23 Using the same method. 234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

NOTE When hard-points are enabled. 27 In the Project Browser. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. Click OK. select Approximate Curve.Atrium. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. . 28 Select the floor. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. Select Use hard-points.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. For Maximum discretized offset. under Structural Plans. double-click 3D . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. enter 0' 4". and on the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. Adding Curved Beams | 235 . 25 Select the beam. click .

1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. Adding an Opening In this exercise. you then copy the opening to each level. Adding an Opening on page 236. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the stairway.rvt.

6 Select the door opening. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Adding an Opening | 237 . click Modify. click Door. 5 On the Design Bar.

select Level 2. under 3D Views. click stairway. 10 While pressing SHIFT. select 3D View. . 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. 11 Click OK. select Level 7. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 12 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View toolbar. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. and double-click 3D View. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. under Structural Plans. To save changes. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . 2 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Finally. The next exercise uses a new training file. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you import the revised beam back into the project. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. click . You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. expand 3D Views.rvt. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

10 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 In the Type Selector.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. 5 Using the sketch tools. 9 Using the sketch tool. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish Sketch. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. click Component. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. enter 0' 2". The next exercise uses a new training file. select both stiffener plates. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. Click OK. for d. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand 3D Views. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. under Structural Plans. Finally. click Training Files. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. 15 Continue with the next exercise. click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 3D View. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 On the Options Bar. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. you load the new family into the project.rvt. Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ .

9 In the Work Plane dialog. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 5 In the Revit dialog. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. click located to the left of Offset. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 13 Press ESC. click Edit Family. and draw a circle approximately as shown. click Modify. The beam is displayed in a new window.3 Select the beam. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and double-click Front. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. under Specify a New Work Plane. click Name. 14 On the Family Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. and click (Circle). click . 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 On the View toolbar. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. 8 On the Family Design Bar.

24 On the Design Bar. click . 20 Press ESC. 21 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. click Finish Sketch. . and click OK. and the select the centerline of the circle. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. regardless of the length. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click The centerline of the circle is now visible. select the Center Mark Visible parameter.15 Select the circle. and select the centerline of the circle. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 17 On the Options Bar. click (Align). click (Align). 25 On the View toolbar.

27 On the View Control toolbar. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening.26 Select the circle on the beam. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam.rfa. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

36 While pressing CTRL.rfa. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. click Load into Projects. 33 Enter ZF. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 38 Click in the drawing area.rvt located in the Imperial project file. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . The project file reopens. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the View toolbar. click .

you add structural walls. In this new training file. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. click Training Files. In addition. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. 40 Continue with the next exercise. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7.rvt. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The modified beams with openings display. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246.

under Structural Plans. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. .Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. select Foundation. for Location Line. select Basic Wall: Foundation . click Structural Wall. select Wall Centerline. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file.12" Concrete. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . 3 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. For Base Constraint. Click OK. double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Top Offset. enter -0' 6".

12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click 3D View. under 3D Views. click . 11 In the Project Browser. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. On portions of the south wall. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. and select Chain.A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline.

8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. In addition. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and click Hide Element. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. double-click Ground Level. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. such as the atrium. 7 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. press TAB. 4 In the Options Bar. and select the foundation wall chain. double-click 3D View. select Foundation for Depth. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file.To save changes. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. click Structural Column. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. 9 On the View Control Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process.

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. The foundation wall is displayed. double-click Ground Level. The next exercise uses a new training file. and concrete beam framing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. click Training Files. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. 3 On the Design Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Click OK. click Slab. sloped slabs. enter 0. click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 10 On the View Control Bar.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. select 6" Concrete. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Floor Properties. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. click Pick Walls. For Height Offset From Level.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. To save changes. 5 On the Design Bar.

NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. click Yes. 7 Click Finish Sketch. click Delete Type. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. 8 In the Project Browser. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. If necessary. double-click 3D View. under 3D Views. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible.

20 On the Design Bar. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. select the line.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. click Modify. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 13 On the Options Bar. click Grid. click Finish. and another between G4 and G5. 12 In the Type Selector. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. expand the warning and select the framing element. click Beam. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 14 Select all grid lines.

Joist.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. select Garage Level -1. click . 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. 27 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Structural Framing (Girder. double-click 3D View. and then click OK. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. Other) and Floors. 23 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . 29 On the Design Bar. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 42 On the View Control Bar. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. Click OK. enter 0. For Height Offset at Head. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. double-click Garage Level -1. 41 In the Project Browser. and select Element Properties. double-click South Elevation. click the Model Graphics Style control. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Height Offset at Tail. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and click Hidden Line. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. click Slab. 36 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 6". click Finish Sketch. 40 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. select Garage Level-1. 38 Right-click the slope arrow.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Slope Arrow. under Structural Plans. 31 On the View Control Bar. For Level at Head.

and zoom in on the ramp. 47 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 5. . 48 In the Work Plane dialog. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Click OK.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . 52 In the Project Browser. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. click Beam System. select Structural Beam System Properties. For Value. under Specify a new Work Plane. under 3D Views. click Set Work Plane. under Number of Lines. click . select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. 45 On the View toolbar. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. select Ground Level. click Lines. click 54 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. Under Pattern. 53 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D View. select Pick a plane. under Structural Views. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type.

You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. 57 In the Project Browser. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. double-click 3D View. and zoom in on the ramp. corner to corner. click . click Finish Sketch. 58 On the View toolbar. 62 Sketch the opening. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. under 3D Views. When you are adding a wall opening. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp.56 On the Design Bar. click . 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are no drawing tools to select.

and continue with the next step. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. 63 On the Design Bar. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. The next exercise uses a new training file. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Unjoin Elements.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. In this case. In addition. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. 64 Select the garage opening. To save changes. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . click Modify.

select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Foundation ➤ Wall. double-click Foundation. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click to select the foundation wall chain. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. 2 Enter ZF. 5 On the Design Bar. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. for Toe length. A continuous foundation is added. For Heel length. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. Click OK twice. click Training Files. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Visibility/Graphics. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. 7 On the Options Bar. under Visibility. enter 1' 6". clear Structural Framing. under Structural Plans. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Dimensions.rvt. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. enter 1' 6". enter 1' 6". click Modify. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. For Foundation Thickness. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Precast Concrete on page 261. double-click 3D View.15 On the Design Bar. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. click Modify. 16 In the Project Browser. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. under 3D Views. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

260 .

In the first lesson. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. click Beam System.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. click Training Files.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. 261 . You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. double-click Roof. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete.

262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. For Clear Spacing. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. select Center. 6 Click to place the beam system. The beam system is displayed. enter 0' 1". do the following: For Layout Rule. 7 In the Project Browser. select Clear Spacing.3 On the Options Bar. For Beam Type. double-click 3D. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Justification. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. Click OK. under Pattern. under 3D Views. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20".

Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. 1 On the View Toolbar. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. .rvt.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click shown. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 .8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

2 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Section 1.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Section). under Structural Plans. click . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. i_RST_Precast-in progress. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. double-click Roof. and click OK. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. for Start and End Extension. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise.3 Right-click the selected beam. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . enter 0' 5". 3 Select the beam system. under Construction. 4 On the Options Bar.

you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click . You then import the revised beam back into the project. and click OK. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. 6 In the Project Browser.4 On the Options Bar. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sections (Building Section). Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. under Construction. enter 0' 0". double-click Section 1. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. for Clear Spacing.

3 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). i_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. click Edit Family. 2 On the Options Bar. The beam is displayed in a new window.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 In the Family Project Browser. and double-click Left. 5 Select the beam. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .

NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. ■ ■ Under Visibility. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. and then click OK. click . click Dimensions and Reference Planes.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 8 In the Revit dialog. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Click Apply. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. click the Annotations Categories tab. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. and click Edit.

select Not a Reference.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". click Ref Plane. click Ref Plane. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. for Is Reference. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. under Options. 16 Press ESC. and click Modify. click . 17 Select the horizontal reference plane.

under Options. 27 On the Options Bar. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. for Is Reference. click . and click OK. select Not a Reference. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . 26 While pressing CTRL. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. select both vertical reference planes. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. 24 Press ESC.22 Press ESC. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. click Dimension.

33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. 34 Press ESC. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. click . 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar.

37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. 38 For the align-to point. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. select the vertical reference plane as shown. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 41 Press ESC. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown.

46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 47 Press ESC. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. click Lines. 45 On the Design bar.44 Press DELETE. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.

click . and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 .Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. 51 On the View Toolbar.

Creating Drawings on page 275. enter 10' 0". Sketch the new profile. click Family Types. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. and then click OK. Align the bottom horizontal surface. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. enter 6' 0". If it does not. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. and click Yes. For Width. select Override parameter values of existing types. 54 In the Family Types dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. click Load into Projects. Click Apply. Add dimensions to each reference plane. The beam should adapt to all changes. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar.

usually contain a title block. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. Sheets are defined by borders. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. and how to create new views from a model. and section views. and are accessible from the Project Browser. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. 3D view. which are a type of view in a project. section. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. 275 . Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. elevation. begin by first creating sheets. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. how to add views to the sheets. and three-dimensional (3D) views.

MA 12345. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. For Client Name. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and click View. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. For Project Name. and click OK. enter Office Structure. enter 2006-01. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. enter Initial Draft. enter J. right-click. click Sheet. click Training Files. Smith. click Edit for Project Address. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. enter 31 March 2006. For Project Number. 4 Click OK. 6 Click OK. For Project Status. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Anytown. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box.

13 Click OK. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . and click Add View to Sheet. expand Sheets (all). and click to place the view. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . on the Options Bar. enter Plans and Elevations. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar.Unnamed.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Add View. 15 In the Views dialog box. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click Modify. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ . 11 When the title block highlights. select Structural Plan: Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. enter S-1. and select the title block. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name.

20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. and click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and click OK. right-click. NOTE If necessary. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. and click Element Properties. Under Extents. right-click. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0" for View Scale. right-click. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. click Add View. 24 With the view selected. clear Crop View. 22 In the Views dialog box. under Graphics. Click OK. specify 1/16" = 1'. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Add View to Sheet. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". select Elevation: South Elevation.17 With the view selected.0" for View Scale. and click Element Properties. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify 1/16" = 1'. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.

32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. select 3D View: East Section . and click Add View to Sheet. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.NOTE If necessary. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference.rvt. 30 In the Views dialog box.Perspective. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . NOTE If necessary. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

and on the Options Bar. is displayed in the Project Browser. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. you add a new sheet to the project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. add a section view. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. click Sheet. click . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. under Identity Data. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . The new sheet. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 Select the title block. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and adjust the scale of the view. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all). and click OK. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

double-click Level 2. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. click Section. select 1/16" = 1'. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag).NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a section view of Level 2. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.0" for Scale. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 On the View Toolbar. click .

double-click S-2 Section Views. under Sheets (all). select Section: Section 1. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View. under Sections (Building Sections). and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. and click OK. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. right-click. under Graphics. and click Properties. Create a callout view. NOTE If necessary. 6 In the Project Browser. specify 3/16" = 1' . and click Add View to Sheet. double click Section 1.0" for View Scale. 10 With the view selected. 8 In the Views dialog box.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . click Callout. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. under Sections (Building Sections). right-click. and click OK. 21 With the view selected. specify 3/4" = 1'. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click S-2 Section Views. 19 In the Project Browser. click . and click Properties. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. click Callout of section 1.0" for View Scale. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and drag the view onto the sheet. and position it approximately as shown. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. under Sheets (all). 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. as shown. under Graphics.15 On the View Toolbar.

you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. Instead of having to draw these details for every project.TYPICAL DETAILS. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Detail Library on page 284. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. and double-click S. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail.1 . expand Sheets (all). you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project.rvt. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save.NOTE If necessary. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson.

TYPICAL DETAILS. Enter Detail Library for the folder name. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 .Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. select Drawing Sheet: S. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder.1 . 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. and click OK. Open the new folder. 3 In the Save Views dialog.

1 . only the 2D elements will be inserted. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. Click Save. For File name. Under Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. Select both Footing Section views. Click Save. Click OK. Only the drafting views will be displayed. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. NOTE When you save your file.TYPICAL DETAILS. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . when you insert these views into a new project. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.■ ■ Under File name. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. enter Footing Section. clear Drawing Sheet: S. select Show drafting views only. however. 6 In the Save Views dialog.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail.1 .rvt. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. click Training Files. Click Open. you learn how import details from the newly created library.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . close the warning dialog that appears. Click OK. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. a duplicate types dialog displays. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding.TYPICAL DETAILS.

Select the file FOOTING SECTION. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. Click Open.rvt. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.TYPICAL DETAILS.5 In the Project Browser.1 . and double-click S. 7 In the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all).

■ Click OK. Click OK. Importing Details from the Library | 289 . a duplicate types dialog appears. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.

select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Select the file Footing Sections. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .rvt. 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.

Importing Details from the Library | 291 . Click OK.■ Click Open. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. a duplicate types dialog appears. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views.

On construction documents. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. Using Legends on page 292.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. and so on). concrete schedule. On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents.

selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 .Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . and click Rename.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . 2 In the Project Browser. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and click OK. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click Symbol. expand Legends. enter Symbol Legend for Name. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.

Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. enter 1/8" text for Name.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. On the Design Bar. click . 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. click Duplicate. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 9 On the Options bar. click Text. 8 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8" for Text Size. 12 Under Text. click Edit/New. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK twice.

click Symbol Legend.Spacer Weld Symbol . 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it.15 Working from the top down.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . click Modify to end the command. 17 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . and double-click S-1 .Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

Under Heading. select Text. click OK. and click View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 30 Under Scheduled fields. click OK. The Rebar field is renamed. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Add Parameter. enter Top Bars for Name. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select REBAR. click Edit for Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. Click OK. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. click OK. under Fields. Under Type of Parameter. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. The new rebar field is added. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. enter Bottom Bars.

To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and click View Properties. click File menu ➤ Save As. and enter REBAR. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. The next exercise uses a new training file. and under Top Bars. under the Fields parameter. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. under Bottom Bars. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. 35 Click the new heading. and under Top Bars. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. and under Top Bars. The schedule is updated with the joist information. For Joists B3. select2-#5C.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. For Joists B2. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. A new blank cell is created above the columns. 34 On the Options bar. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 .rvt. click Edit for Value. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. click Group. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. under Bottom Bars. under Schedules/Quantities. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Bottom Bars. select 2-#5C. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. click Training Files. enter 2-#5 C.

■ Click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Cost. and click Add. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Available Fields. enter 3 for Cost. and press ENTER. click OK. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Number for Type. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. Because cost is a type parameter. click OK. 8 Under Joist B1. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. and click Add. Click Calculated Value. select Volume.

NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. under Formatting. Under Field Formatting. and press ENTER. Click OK. select 2 Decimal Places. click Edit for Value. Under Rounding. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. enter 1. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Calculate totals. select $. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Currency. Under Fields. Under Units. and click View Properties. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Total Cost. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. under Formatting. select Total Cost. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. In the Format dialog. 9 Under Joist B2. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Fields. click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Value. click Field Format. Under Unit Symbol. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.5 for Cost. clear Use default settings.

The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The next lesson uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. click OK. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. To save changes.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK.■ Click OK. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson.

click Graphical Column Schedule. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and zoom in on the schedule. click Edit for Hidden Levels. 6 On the Toolbar. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. The schedule is created automatically. and Ground Level. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. select Foundation. click OK. and select View Properties. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 .Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. Garage Level . click . under Other.1. 2 Right-click the column schedule. and click OK.

NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column. Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .

For Column Locations. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . under Horizontal Widths. under Vertical Heights. click Edit. and select View Properties. and click OK. enter 3". click OK. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. for Below Bottom Level.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. select Group Similar Locations. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter 3". ■ In the Element Properties dialog. and for Grid Appearance. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog.

under Graphical Column Schedules. select Courier New from the drop-down list. 9 Right-click the schedule. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. and select View Properties. and then select Bold and Italic. click Edit for Value. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. 2 Right-click the schedule. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Text Appearance. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. click Training Files. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. and click OK. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then select Bold. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Level text. and select View Properties. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. under Graphics. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 9 Click OK. Enter 2" for Level Names. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. under Identity Data. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title.

select Vertical. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Under Orientation. 11 On the Options bar. click . 18 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and click OK. select Structural Column Tags. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 17 On the Options bar. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and clear Leader. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Vertical. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Structural Columns. click Tag All Not Tagged.

Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. click . click 20 On the Toolbar. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. and select View Properties. .19 On the Toolbar. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . and zoom in on one of the column tags.

do the following. enter 10. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Click OK. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. expand Sheets (all). 3 In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options bar.0". click Modify. The next exercise uses a new training file. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. and select the titleblock. enter 1/4" = 1' . 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. ■ ■ Under View Scale. click Training Files. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 23 Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Column Locations per Segment. enter S-3. enter Steel Column Schedule. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. Under Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. click Sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. enter S-4. click Modify. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. 10 Select the schedule. under Extents. Click OK. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. 15 On the Options bar.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. 14 On the Design Bar. and click to place the view. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click . select Steel Column Schedule. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . and select the titleblock. select Graphical Column Schedule. click OK. click Add View. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. and double-click Sheet S-4. click ■ ■ ■ . Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. 8 In the Views dialog. Under Sheet Number. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

6 Click Finish. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. under Graphical Column Schedule. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. under Graphical Column Schedule. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 25 On the Project Browser.19 On the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and click to place the view. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 9 Under Directories. click OK. and click to place the view. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and drag it onto the sheet. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). click File menu ➤ Save As. under Graphical Column Schedule. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.mdb. enter Revit_Project. 22 On the Project Browser. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 26 On the Project Browser. and click to place the view. and click OK to create the database. click Create. and click Next. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. The next exercise uses a new training file. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 8 In the New Database dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. and double-click Sheet S-6. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. under Database. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click OK. select a location for the database file. 3 Click New. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click the File Data Source tab. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. under Database Name. 10 When the confirmation message displays. To save changes. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). click Graphical Column Schedule 1.

14 Proceed to the next tutorial. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. For example.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. To save changes. Steel Details on page 329. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). so that each table of elements includes an ID column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The next tutorial uses a new training file.

328 .

Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. You cut a section in plan.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. revise a callout view. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. and add these views to a sheet. Structural Plans. click Training Files. revise an existing elevation view. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). 2 Select . and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. and double-click Level 4.rvt. expand Views (all). Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 329 . and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail).

7 Select . select the elevation crop view. 4 In the elevation view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and select 3/4" =1' . click Section. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under Structural Plans. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. double-click Level 4.0". Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser.3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and select 1/2" =1' .9 Draw a section as shown. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. 15 Select .0". 12 Select the section crop view. double-click West Elevation. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 On the Design Bar.

17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Create a sheet and place the section. and click OK.Steel Details. and click Add View. and click to place the view.Steel Details. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. and click Add View to Sheet. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 In the Views dialog. 24 In the Views dialog. and click OK. and click to place the view. 26 In the Project Browser.Steel Details. right-click S-6 . elevation. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. enter Steel Details for Name. and select 3/4" =1' . and click Add View. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 30 In the Views dialog. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. right-click S-6 . 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 23 In the Project Browser.0". 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. select Section: Section 1. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Rename. and click Add View. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click S-6 . and click to place the view.

double click Elevation 1-a. and a facade support detail to the model. 2 On the Toolbar. Detailing Steel on page 333. a bolted angle detail.rvt. . 33 Proceed to the next lesson. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. click braces meet at Level 4. Detailing Steel In this lesson.rvt. you add a welded bracing detail. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You will sketch the lines in a model view. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_DET-in progress. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).

enter the value. TIP After establishing the line direction. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown.3 Select the left brace.

8 On the Options Bar.Next. click . and select Copy. and click to place the detail line. enter 2' 6" for Offset. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 10 Click to place this line. click Detail Lines. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. click Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 7 On the Options Bar. select Numerical.

336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. click Detail Lines. click Modify. and select the horizontal detail line.15 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown.

click Add a Leader. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. click the left top weld annotation. 21 Select the weld symbol. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. and press DELETE to delete this element. Repeat for the right bottom value. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. 23 On the Design Bar.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. and enter 3/8. Repeat for the left bottom value. and click to place it. and select the weld symbol. click Modify. 20 Click Modify. and enter a period. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . drag it into the view as shown. 24 On the Options Bar.

27 Right-click the new weld symbol. Click OK. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. select Weld All Around.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. and click Properties. Under Graphics. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

double-click Section 1. and enter 3/8" PL for text. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8.rvt. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Options Bar. click . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. i_RST_DET-in progress. 30 On the Options Bar. TYPICAL for text as shown. Then you add some annotations. under Sections.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the first part of the exercise. click Text.

6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section.2 In the Project Browser. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. select L4x4x5/16. click Text. 7 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click . 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

2 On the Toolbar.8 Enter the text notes as shown. click Level 4 at Grid 4. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. i_RST_DET-in progress. . double-click West Elevation. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.

7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice.7. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. and select the left side of the column as shown. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click . expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. and click to place it. select C5x6. 8 On the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Project Browser. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. move it to the position shown.

Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 . select the back of the channel as shown.9 Next. 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown.

7. a new training file is supplied. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. select the bolt. A325 BOLT. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. under Sheets. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 Proceed to the next lesson.11 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. click Text. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next lesson. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown.

5 In the Type Selector.Section: W18x35. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. select Detail Component. select Detail Component.Deck Span Transition.Deck Span Transition. 9 In the Type Selector. Click OK. click Drafting View. and double-click Typical Detail .rvt. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Side: 14K3. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown.0". Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. Under Scale.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . 2 In the New Drafting dialog. select 1 1/2" = 1' . select K-Series Bar Joist . enter Typical Detail . 7 On the Design bar. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . 11 On the Design bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. click Modify. click Training Files. click Modify. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Drafting Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam.

18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Repeating Detail. 17 On the Design bar. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. select Detail Component.5 WR 22. 21 On the Design bar. select AISC Tube Shapes .125.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. select Detail Component. 14 Click the end of the joist. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 19 In the Type Selector. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Modify. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown.

Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. click Modify. select Detail Component. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. clear Symbol Left. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 27 In the Type Selector. Under Other. drag it into the view as shown. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. and click to place it.25 On the Design bar. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select Field Weld. 32 Select the weld symbol. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. 29 On the Design bar. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. click Modify. and select Symbol Right.

click Modify. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text.34 On the Design Bar. click Add a Leader. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Text. 40 On the Design bar. click . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. and select the weld symbol. click Text. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown.

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . 44 Proceed to the next tutorial.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and navigate to a folder location of your choice.

350 .

351 . you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure.

rvt. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. under Detail Views (Detail). double-click Beam Detail. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 2 On the Toolbar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. positioned to the right of the drawing area. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click . and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. scroll down the list of available shapes.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. and select Rebar Shape: S3. 6 Hover over the section view. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. For training purposes. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 .

click Modify. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. click Modify. and select Rebar Shape: 01. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. For Spacing. and select Rebar Shape: T9. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. approximately as shown. scroll down the list of available shapes. enter 0’ 6”. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and select Rebar Shape: 01. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. select Maximum Spacing. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

19 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. For Quantity. click Modify. approximately as shown. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. For Layout. select Rebar Bar: #6. click Modify. select Fixed Number. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . enter 4.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. and on the Options Bar. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown.

25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. select Detail Level: Fine. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Toolbar.23 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. 28 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click . click . and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. click Edit for View Visibility States. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. select both View unobscured and View as solid. for 3D View. click OK. under 3D Views.

and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . .

The next exercise uses a new training file.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. click File menu ➤ Save As.

rvt. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. click Training Files. double-click Column Detail. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. under Detail Views (Detail). using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. 2 On the Toolbar. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. positioned to the right of the drawing area. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. click . The Rebar Shape Browser launches.

and select Rebar Shape: T1. select Maximum Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. For Spacing. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. 8 On the Design Bar. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 6 Hover over the section view. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For training purposes. enter 0’ 3”. For Layout. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. select Rebar Bar: #4. scroll down the list of available shapes. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar.

For Layout. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. select Fixed Number. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. select Rebar Bar: #8. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . and select Rebar Shape: 00. click Modify. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. click (Copy). and on the Options Bar. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. scroll down the list of available shapes.10 On the Design Bar. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. For Quantity. 17 On the Edit toolbar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. as shown. enter 3. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. click Modify.

select both View unobscured and View as solid. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 29 On the Toolbar. under Graphics. 27 On the View Control Bar. click Edit for View Visibility States. for 3D View. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. click OK. double-click 3D. select Detail Level: Fine. and click OK. under 3D Views. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog.22 On the Options Bar.

you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364.Notice that the rebar sets are visible.

click . 7 In the section view. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.0" for Scale. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 3/4" = 1' .Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Garage Level-1. 6 On the View Control Bar. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . under Structural Plans. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. select the crop view. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. 2 On the Toolbar. click Section. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown.

double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . 11 On the Options Bar.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. click Lines. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. 12 On the Design Bar.

adjacent to the major bars. under Sections (Building Sections). To change the major direction. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. 13 On the Design Bar. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. on the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click Section 3. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Project Browser. click Major Direction Edge.

Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click OK.Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. 16 On the Options Bar. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. click . under Layers.

For Interior Minor Number of Lines. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . select Fixed Number. enter 30. under Layers. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. and click OK.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. Click OK. under Construction. enter 30. for Value. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30. enter 30. For Interior Major Number of Lines.

under Layers. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click Modify. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 27 On the Design Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. click Modify. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. click Tag ➤ By Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. change all Bar Types to #4. . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 28 Using the drag control.

Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. 2 On the Toolbar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . click . double-click Garage Level-1. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click File menu ➤ Save As. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. under Structural Plans.rvt. click Training Files.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown.

For Model Graphics Style.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 7 In the section view. select 1/4" = 1' . click Section. For Detail Level. select Fine. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. select the crop view.0". select Shading w/Edges. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 6 On the View Control Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.

to enter sketch mode. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. click .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . double-click Garage Level -1. 11 Using the line tool.

click Finish Sketch. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .12 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 4. 13 In the Project Browser.

24 Using the drag control. 23 Select the rebar tag. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. change all Bar Types to #4. select Attached End. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. and click OK. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. under Layers. under Layers. click . clear Top Major Direction.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 19 On the Design Bar.

Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. To save changes. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. click File menu ➤ Save As. click . click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. double-click Level 3. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. You are now in sketch mode. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Toolbar. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Select the slab opening.rvt.

click Finish Sketch. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. 7 On the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . click . and enter 1' 0" for Offset. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop.5 On the Options Bar.

click Create a section view .0". 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select the crop view. under Layers. For Detail Level. click Section. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 17 In the section view. select Shading w/Edges. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. click Modify. select Fine. select #4. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. For Model Graphics Style. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . for Primary Bar . select 1/4" = 1' .10 On the Options Bar.Type.

20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. . Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 25 Using the drag control. 23 On the Design Bar. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. 24 Select the rebar tag. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. select Free End. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . and on the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click 19 Select the rebar. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag.

To save changes. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. and position the upper drag bar as shown. under Structural Plans. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 On the Toolbar. . draw a pick box. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. click Training Files. click structure.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. double-click Ground Level.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. 5 Double-click the section bubble. and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.4 Press ESC. click . The Section 1 view opens. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 .

select Boundary between faces. and click (Line). click (Draw). click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar.NOTE For training purposes. Sketch 3 lines as shown. 7 On the Toolbar. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. click (Edit Cut Profile). select Chain. 8 On the Options Bar.

14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 16 Press ESC. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Options Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 19 On the Options Bar. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown.

click Finish Sketch. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. select Standard . 22 Press ESC.90 deg.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 26 Click OK. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click Element Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Sketch tab. for Hook At Start. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. under Construction. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host.

and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown. 30 In the Type Selector.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . (Mirror). click wall. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. select Rebar Bar: #8. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar.

37 Select the rebar set. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. 36 On the Options Bar.Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. click Modify. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing. select Minimum Clear Spacing. enter 4". 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 33 On the Design Bar.

click (Edit Rebar Cover). 41 On the Options Bar. click 42 Select the footing. (Pick Elements). Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar.39 On the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . click Modify.

click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). (Pick Faces). click 46 On the Options Bar. . 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog.43 On the Options Bar. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. For Setting. enter 0' 2". For Description. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. do the following: Click Add. 47 Select the face of the structural wall. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Click OK.

52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. Click OK. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . select Exposed/Cast against Earth. do the following: Under Description. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. click ■ ■ . click Dimension.48 On the Options Bar. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. 53 Click to select this plane. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array.

click structure. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor down. . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.rvt. 2 On the Toolbar. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Garage Level . 5 On the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and position the drag bar as shown. click Section. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. draw a pick box. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. click Training Files. click Modify. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.1. 6 Click the section line.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser.

select the crop view. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 9 In the section view. and select 3/4" = 1'. 8 Double-click the section bubble. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. The Section 2 view opens. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.7 Press ESC.0".

Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Maximum Spacing. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . 16 Press the SPACEBAR. do the following: ■ For Layout. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. as shown. click Modify. select Rebar Bar : #7. 17 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.NOTE For training purposes. 14 On the Design Bar.

1. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the rebar set. enter 1' 6".■ For Spacing. 22 On the Edit toolbar. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. draw a zoom box. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. click . and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. click (Mirror). and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level .

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.24 Click to place the rebar. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. and click Zoom to Fit. click Sketch. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. 26 On the Toolbar. click . 28 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 36 On the Edit toolbar. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 33 Press ESC. 32 Click to place the rebar.You are now in sketch mode. click . 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 34 On the Design Bar.1.

Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 .38 Click to place the rebar.

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.40 Press CTRL.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. for 3D View. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. select View unobscured and View as solid. click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. double-click 3D. 45 In the Project Browser. click OK. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click Edit for View Visibility States.41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 .

select Maximum Spacing. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 1' 6". and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. For Spacing. Notice the rebar is visible. click .47 On the Toolbar. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . To save changes. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. and on the Options Bar.

radial. and ordinate. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. multi-segmented. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. The dimension types include aligned. By default. baseline. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. angular. click Training Files. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 403 . you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. click Dimension.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. Dimensioning In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. and double-click Floor.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. linear. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Structure. select it. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.

6 Move the cursor to the left.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. and click to place the dimension. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. toward the empty space outside the wall.

click Dimension. 8 On the Design Bar. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click the lock to unlock it. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. 13 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. click Modify. 11 Select the dimension. 10 On the Toolbar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension.The dimension displays in the drawing. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. indicating that the dimension can be modified. Creating Dimensions | 405 . 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. The lock displays as locked. and click to set the dimension location. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. select Wall faces for Prefer. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the lock. (Undo).

406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. In addition. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall.

Select the inside face of the wall. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). as shown. click ■ ■ .The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. and press DELETE. the default dimension option. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. click for Prefer. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. and place the dimension as shown. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. click Modify. and select Wall faces for Prefer.

click OK. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. . The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. click Dimension. Click Apply. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). and click to place the dimension. click . for Dimension String Type. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. 33 On the Design Bar. Move your cursor to the right.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. click . 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. and OK. select Baseline. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar.

for Dimension String Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. 41 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. click Edit/New. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. and OK. Creating Dimensions | 409 . 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. click OK. 43 On the Options Bar. click . Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). .

click Replace with Text.6" Click Apply and OK. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 51 On the Design Bar. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. +/. click Modify.F.I. enter V. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.M. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. (See Architectural Drawing). and enter S. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value.D. under Text Fields. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .A. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step.rvt.A. Click Apply and OK. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog.

select it. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB repeatedly. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. 11 Place the dimension as shown. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. delete. including the wall centerline. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 .Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. but do not select anything. When you place dimensions. For example. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. However. and select it. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. in some cases. a different wall selection choice highlights. and select the exterior face. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. click Dimension.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. you learn to add. Each time you press TAB. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. and select the exterior face.

and control boxes display on each witness line. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . The dimension highlights. click Modify.Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed.

16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. The witness line is deleted. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . but do not select it. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line moves to interior wall face.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. 17 Right-click the control box. 15 Click the control box again. and click Delete Witness Line.

i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. a context menu with different options is displayed. click Edit/New. If you right-click the control box. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. The full dimension string is displayed. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 To end the editing command. click . 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. and click Edit Witness Lines. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building.

4 In the Type Properties dialog. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . For example. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. In the next exercise. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. As you create components. 5 Click OK twice. when sketching walls. click Training Files. click Modify. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. then Up for Read Convention. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. select Right. if 2 or more walls are colinear. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. 6 On the Design Bar. Under Text. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. not the direction it is read. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. a new training file is provided. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. The dimension updates as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a lock symbol immediately displays.

indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. select Multiple Alignment. click (Align). The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. The symbol changes to a closed lock. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 Click the lock. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. indicating that the Align command is active. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. 6 Select the short wall to the left.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. When you align 2 components.

Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 11 On the Toolbar.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. click (Undo) once to undo the move. 12 Click the right wall. and drag it downward. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. clear Multiple Alignment. click (Align). 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.Move the walls to verify the alignment.

and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. and align the windows. 19 To view the constraint. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. A lock is displayed. indicating the constraint. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension.The 2 windows align. 21 On the Toolbar. click Modify. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. as shown. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . click . on the Design Bar. 22 Align the remaining windows.

Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. i_RST_Alignment-in progress. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. and notice that it includes 5 openings. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 1 View the south wall. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt.

verify that Wall centerlines is selected.2 On the Design Bar. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 5 Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Modify. Click Options. select Openings and Widths. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. For Prefer. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. and click to add the dimension. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The 2 vertical walls highlight. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Select the south wall. click Dimension. You can save the open file if you wish. For Pick. a new training file is provided. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the windows). Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . select Entire Walls. In the next exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 On the Design Bar.

click . 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click to place the spot dimension. Move the cursor to the left. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. 4 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). and for Relative Base. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. Click to create the second leader point. expand Structural Plans. and double-click New Roof. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. select Current Level.

Click to create the second leader point. 7 On the Options Bar. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. Click to place the spot dimension. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension.■ On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. and for Relative Base. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . Move the cursor to the right. click Modify. select Leader. select Current Level. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right.

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Structural Plans. click . and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. select Leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click to create the second leader point. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. and Current Level for Relative Base. and double-click Foundation.■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up and to the right.

for Single/Upper Value Prefix. Click to create the third leader point. do the following: Under Text. 19 On the Options Bar. ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Click OK. click Modify.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. enter TOF=. click Modify. click ■ . Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . 21 On the Design Bar.

click . 25 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. click Modify. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. click OK. Click Apply. and double-click South Elevation. 23 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. select Medium. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. For Text Location. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 29 On the View Control Bar. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. for Detail Level. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. click Edit/New. select In-line with Leader. and then OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

click Modify. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. under Text.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. click . click Edit/New. Click to create the second leader point. click Modify. Click to place the spot coordinate. select In-line with Leader. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. For Text Location. Move the cursor to the right. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. On the Design Bar. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . click OK. 33 On the Options Bar. For Elevation Indicator. enter EL. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. and then OK.

Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Structural Plans.rvt. You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. click Beam Annotations. In the next lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Training Files. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. a new training file is provided.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Annotating on page 428. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. Annotating In this lesson. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. Tagging Beams In this exercise.

■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. Click Settings. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. select All beams in current plan view. enter 1". Click OK. select All selected beams in current plan view. 5 On the Design Bar. In the Placement Settings dialog. click Beam Annotations. and click OK.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. NOTE For training purposes. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. for Horizontal End Offset. do the following: ■ Under Placement. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog.

select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. click the Level beams in plan tab. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Select Element to Place. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. ■ Under Annotation location and type. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. and click OK. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. click .0 kip for End Reaction . Under Structural Framing Tag.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. enter 10. click OK. click Structural Framing Tag. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Live. and click OK. under Analysis Results. Click .

click Apply. . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. click Edit/New. enter W18. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Type Mark. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). . 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Type Mark. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and then OK. enter W14. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.9 On the Design Bar. Tagging Beams | 431 . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Apply. and then OK. click OK. click Edit/New.

and on the Options Bar. under Label. click OK. 22 Click the structural label.20 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 31 In the Type Selector. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and on the Options bar. Click Save. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. under Category Parameters. Enter Structural Framing Tag . select Type Mark. select the active file. and. click parameter(s) to a label). 24 In the Edit Label dialog. You are now in the Family Editor. and click OK. click . click Load into Projects. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. select the W14X22 beam tag. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click the W18X40 beam tag. 28 On the Family Design Bar. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. click Edit Family. click Yes.by Type Mark: Standard. select Structural Framing Tag . for Value. 27 In the Save As dialog. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog.by Type Mark for File name. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. while pressing CTRL. click Edit. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing.

do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.32 Enter ZF. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Select Structural Framing Tags. 33 On the Options bar. click ■ ■ (Filter). Tagging Beams | 433 . 34 In the Filter dialog.

■ Click OK. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. 36 To save your changes. select Structural Framing Tag .by Type Mark: Standard. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. 35 In the Type Selector. click File menu ➤ Save As. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise.rvt. click Edit Label. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. 40 Click File ➤ Close. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click Beam System Tag. click Training Files. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . In the next exercise a new training file is provided. click Yes. click Edit Family. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435.NOTE For training purposes. You can save the open file if you wish. You are now in the Family Editor. and on the Options Bar. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Structural Plans. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. 3 Click the structural label. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types.

and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. enter ] (close bracket). and for Suffix. enter S1. 8 On the Options Bar. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. . 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). select Reference Planes. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. for Prefix. select Top. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Prefix. select 3. select Camber Size. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. click OK. Under Category Parameters. enter ( (left parenthesis). and select Break. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter W14X22. enter ) (right parenthesis). enter C=1/2".Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. select Number of studs. and for Suffix. Select parameter 2. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter [ (open bracket). for Sample Value. (Add parameter). Select parameter 3. click . for Spaces. for Sample Value. for Vertical Align. for Sample Value. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. and click OK. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. under Graphics. Under Visibility.

13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. and double-click Level 2. click Load into Project. In the Reload Family dialog. 12 Select the text on the beam label. expand Schedules/Quantities. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. and click Yes. 14 Click Modify.■ Click OK. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. click Override parameter values of existing types. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 .

19 On the Options Bar. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. Click OK. Worksets on page 439. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. do the following: Under Structural. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. click ■ . and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference.

Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. In the next exercise. they cannot make changes to it.Worksets 12 On many building projects. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. click Training Files. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. You can enable Worksharing for any project. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. Using Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. 439 . This prevents possible conflicts within the project. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users.rvt. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. In Revit Structure 2009. however.) is called a workset. etc. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. beams. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. slabs. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. In this tutorial. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 5 Under Show. The Worksets dialog is displayed. and notice all are editable by you. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. Project Standards.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and Views. under Show. one team member is assigned to the slabs. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. 7 In the New Workset dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Therefore. In this simple training project. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). a third is assigned all beams and columns. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. In this case. For training purposes. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. For training purposes. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. enter Beams and Columns. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. imagine 5 users including yourself. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Only User-Created worksets should display. a second user is assigned the roof. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. click New. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. clear Families. 3 In the Worksets dialog.

Click OK. 13 In the New Workset dialog. 9 In the New Workset dialog.■ Click OK. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. enter Elevator Shafts. Click OK. click New. click New. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. click New. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. enter Foundation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . 11 In the New Workset dialog. 10 In the Worksets dialog. enter Slabs. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. Click OK.

enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files.14 In the Worksets dialog. Click OK. Click OK. Clear Visible by default in all views. this improves performance. Click OK. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. enter Garage Ramp. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Clear Visible by default in all views. Again. 19 In the New Workset dialog. The roof should only be visible in specific views. enter Roof. 15 In the New Workset dialog. Again. click New. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. 17 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. this improves performance.

NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. enter Worksets Project . for file name. Now that you have created the central file. 23 Click Save.Central. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 On the right side of the dialog. 25 In the Worksets dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. under Show. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 22 In the Save As dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . The next step is to create the central file. 20 In the Worksets dialog. click Non Editable.

and click Open. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . navigate to a folder on your local computer.Central on the network drive. enter Initial Central File Setup. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Close. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. Assigning Worksets on page 445. 33 Select the file. 35 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 31 After the file is saved. 28 In the Worksets dialog. and click Save. click OK. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. under Comments.In the Worksets dialog. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 37 Proceed to the next exercise.

In the Worksets dialog. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. checked in all worksets. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member.In this exercise. You then created the central file. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. Assigning Worksets | 445 . click . This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that all worksets are available for editing. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and created a local file. for Workset. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 6 Click OK. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. select Beams and Columns. 2 Click Cancel.

notice that User1 is listed. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Filter dialog.The Worksets dialog. click Check None. 13 Select Structural Columns. click . under Borrowers for Workset1. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 9 Click Cancel. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and click OK.

The puzzle-piece icons disappear. click . for Workset. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Right-click one of the columns. and click Make Elements Editable. select Beams and Columns. Assigning Worksets | 447 .All structural columns in the model are highlighted. but the columns remain highlighted. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.

Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. 2 Click Open.17 Click OK. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. clear Borrowed Elements. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under After save relinguish editable. and click OK. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. to save the local file. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1.

8 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click OK. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. click Check None. 4 In the Worksets dialog. click . select Workset1. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 7 On the Options Bar. and select Floors.In the Worksets dialog.

click . select Slabs.9 Click OK. 12 Click OK. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. All floors are highlighted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Workset. 10 On the Options Bar. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

foundation. 18 Enter VV.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. 16 Click OK. select Roof. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. for Workset. click the Worksets tab. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. and the garage ramp. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 14 On the Options Bar. click . assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts.

Roof.20 Clear Beams and Columns. 23 Check Beams and Columns. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 22 Enter VV. and then click Apply and OK. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear the box next to the desired element. click the Worksets tab. and then click Apply and OK. and Slabs. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. Roof. The elements are now visible in the view. and Slabs. To turn off additional elements.

3 On the Settings menu. each user must check out worksets. For training purposes. two users access the central file through a network connection. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 28 Click OK. under User name. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. If you have not yet completed these exercises. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Options. specifically sequenced. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. one user has already created a local file. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. return to the Settings dialog.25 In the Save to Central dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. This is a system setting. 27 Under Comment. enter User 2. skip the following section. Throughout the process. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . Throughout the remainder of this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. please do so before continuing. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. and reload the latest changes. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. make elements editable. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. instructions are staggered. 4 Click the General Tab and. For training purposes. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and reset the User name to your computer login name.rvt. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. In the following section of this exercise. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. and proceed to Create a local copy.

20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. select Specify. In addition. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. 11 In the Save As dialog. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. modify the structural model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets .7 In the Open dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Click Open. If it is not open. under Open Worksets. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This file is for your use only. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. and move it. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Click OK. 15 Select the Foundation workset. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. it becomes the active workset. expand 3D Views. select the central file and. 22 Click OK. and click Save. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. User 1: Check out worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click Options. If you only have one workset checked out. open it now. select all the User-Created worksets. You now have a local copy of the project.

That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. select a footing. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 Click OK. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click 3D-Atrium.

35 On the Project Browser. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Modify. 37 In the Design Bar. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. Even though the Roof workset is active. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. This is because when the Roof workset was created. 39 On the View menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Yes for Editable. Therefore. and click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. click Slab. click Pick Supports. under Structural Plans. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. double-click Roof. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Roof to turn on its visibility. 38 On the Design Bar. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. However. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. Click Yes. User 1: Reload latest worksets.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 34 Select Roof. and click OK.

and these problems are rectified. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 44 Click OK. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. and click Open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. At the appropriate point in this exercise. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. throughout this training. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. select them. This exercise requires two users and. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. In this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . you save the training file as a central file. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. As each of you work. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Each user checked out worksets. In subsequent steps. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. There are specific instructions for each user. Check out worksets. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. In the final exercise of this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. 2 In the Worksets dialog. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Each user must have network access to the central file.

You are now the owner of that workset. select Beams and Columns. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. and select Yes for Editable. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. At this point. select a footing. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and double-click 3D-Atrium. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 7 Under Active Workset. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select Foundation. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 4 Under Active Workset. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. expand 3D Views. and click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 11 Move the footing. 9 On the Options Bar. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.3 Select the Foundation workset. select the Beams and Columns workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization.

A message informs you that your request has been granted. to Local. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. In this case. select the following. select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 16 Click Close. 18 Click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . click Check Now. Project Coordination on page 461. In this multi-user exercise. 15 Click Grant.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and click OK. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and notice the footing is in the new location. you requested permission to edit the element.

460 .

rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the copy monitor feature was activated. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. click Training Files. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. or postponed.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. which can be accepted. levels. a warning is displayed. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. In this tutorial. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. In the tutorial. rejected. depending on the impact to the design. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. Once each change has been reviewed. Starting a New Project on page 149. Finally. reviews each change individually. Coordination Review In this lesson. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. 461 . Finally. walls. Click OK to open the file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and columns for any future modifications. floors.

rvt. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. under Graphics. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. select the Revit Links tab. under Structural Plans. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. 8 On the View Toolbar. double-click Level 3. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Apply. 7 Enter ZF. select Coordination for Discipline. click .1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. Click . Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible.

click as shown. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. . Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click Wireframe. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select .9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. 10 On the Toolbar. . On the View Control Bar. Click to select the linked file. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

and click Show. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. and click Apply. Accept Difference.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. Actions include: Postpone. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. and then click Show. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. press SHIFT. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. These messages identify elements that were deleted. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. moved. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. select the remaining messages. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. Reject. In the Action column. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .

■ For Action. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. and click Apply. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. select Modify Grid B. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. Click the message i_RBD_After. and click Show. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. click .rvt: Grids: Grid:B.

20 In the Coordination Review dialog. press SHIFT. and click Apply. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. expand Maintain wall position. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . For Action. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. and select the remaining messages.

Select Postpone for Action. Click the Add Comment field. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Click the Add Comment field. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress.8" Masonry. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. In the Edit Comment dialog. Click OK. enter Need to discuss with architect. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . In the Coordination Review dialog. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog.rvt.12" Concrete. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. click Apply. enter Need to discuss with architect. Select Postpone for Action. and OK.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. Interference Check In this exercise.24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt for Categories from. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. select i_RBD_After. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Interference Check on page 468. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. The default table compares elements within the same project. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway.

and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 . select Structural Columns.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.

4 Click OK. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns.

■ Select i_RBD_After. enter Columns vs. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Under Save as type. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. Interference Check | 471 . ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. select a folder location on your local computer. and that it interferes with the stairway. select Revit Interference Report (*. Click Save.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. Stair Check. Click Export to generate an interference report. Each representing a different level. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window.html). Under File name.

9 In the Interference Check dialog.7 In the Interference Report dialog. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . click Close. select i_RBD_After.rvt for Categories from. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. 11 Click OK.

also the brace interferes with the opening. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. enter Brace vs. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors.12 In the Interference Report dialog. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . Select i_RBD_After.html). Door opening. Under Save as type.rvt: Doors: Door Single. Under File name. select Revit Interference Report (*. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Interference Check | 473 . select a folder location on your local computer. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.

This is the date the revisions were identified.rvt. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. In general. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. In the next lesson. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.■ Click Save. if the active revision is number 1. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. click Training Files. and enter 2/15/06. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. a new training file is provided. yet as concise as possible. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. click Revisions. If you select By Project. For example. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 2 In the Revisions dialog. 4 Click on the value for Description. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. You can create a sequence of revisions. click Close.

Revision clouds have read-only properties. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. However. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. click near grid line B. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. double-click S. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.1 . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. 7 Click Apply. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 4 In the drawing area. under Sheets (all). and select Activate View. and OK.If Visible is not selected. including revision number and revision date. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.Level 3 Framing Plan. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. In most instances. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. click Revision Cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.

9 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. click Add: New. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. 4 Click on the value for Description. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Revisions. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. When Issued is selected. i_RST_Revision-in progress. NOTE At this point. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 2 In the Revisions dialog. In general. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line.rvt.rvt. and enter 2/20/06. In this tutorial. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.7 On the Design Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. yet as concise as possible. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 14 Click on the value for Description. 11 On the Design Bar. In most instances. and enter 2/21/06. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . and enter Research brace. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. click Add: New. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. click Revision Cloud. click above the elevator shaft. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog.If Visible is not selected. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.

Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. double-click S. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. yet as concise as possible.2 . 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When Issued is selected. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and select Activate View. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.Stair Shafts Sections.In general. 20 In the drawing area. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. If Visible is not selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. click above the brace. In most instances. click Revision Cloud. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet.

yet as concise as possible. click Add: New. 26 Click on the value for Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/22/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . the revision is locked and issued to the field. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. In general.23 On the Design Bar. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. click Finish Sketch. 28 Verify that Visible is selected. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. and enter Research door. When Issued is selected. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review.

34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. click Revision Cloud. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . double-click S. and select Activate View. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Sheets (all). 37 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. i_RST_Revision-in progress. 35 On the Design Bar. click above the door. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.If Visible is not selected. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.Stair Shafts Sections. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. click Finish Sketch. 32 In the drawing area. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.2 .

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by sheet. the cloud is tagged as number 1. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and then issue the revisions to create a record. Working with Revisions In this exercise. double-click S. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. Working with Revisions | 481 .1 . under Sheets (all). the tag is displayed inside the cloud. i_RST_Revision-in progress. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. 6 Click to place the tag. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. 5 In the drawing area.Level 3 Framing Plan. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and lock it from further changes. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Working with Revisions on page 481. and because the revision is the first in the project. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and select Activate View. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.rvt.

NOTE After you issue a revision. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click S. You do this by issuing the revision. you can no longer modify it. 2 Select . 4 Select . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry.1 . On the Settings menu. and click OK.Stair Shafts Sections.2 . you prevent further changes to the revision. double-click S. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.Level 3 Framing Plan. under Sheets (all). click Revisions. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. under Sheets (all). and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown.

Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial.7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Revisions | 483 .

484 .

All views created with that template are not automatically updated. Discipline. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. The physical model that is used for documentation. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. geometry. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. To update a view. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 485 . The analytical model consists of structural components. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. loads and load combinations. you can reapply the modified template. Detail level. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. quantity take off. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. As you create objects and the physical model.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. component properties. material properties. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. the template is still applied to the 3D view. Views and View Templates are not linked. if you save a template from a plan view. When working with the analytical model. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. For example.

Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. you learn how to check member supports. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below.Analytical Checks In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. click Training Files. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

under the Analytical Model Settings tab. 4 In the Warning dialog click . Analytical Checks | 487 . Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. to view each warning. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. or isolated). 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 5 Close the Warning dialog. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. wall.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

Analytical Checks | 489 . Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show.

Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. D-2. 10 In the Warning dialog. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . under Structural Plans. H-3. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Close. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. click Modify. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 14 On the Design bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. E-3. and H-4. D-4. double-click Ground Level. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . expand 3D Views. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. click to view each warning.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. 3 In the Warning dialog. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. 4 Close the Warning dialog.

The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area.■ ■ Click Show. 7 In the Warning dialog. click . 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and on the Options Bar. click Close. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. under Analytical Model. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection.

click OK. 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. Analytical Checks | 493 .9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Press CTRL. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit).

13 On the Options Bar. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. for Top Vertical Projection. a new training file is provided. you edit and add load cases. click . Load Cases on page 494. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . You can save the open file if you wish. select Top of Column. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. The Warning dialog does not appear. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. 14 Under Analytical Model. click OK.

In this table. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. then click Duplicate. edit. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. you learn how to add new load cases.The first table is the Load Cases table. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. Revit Structure provides a default number. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. The selected load case is copied in the table. In this exercise. Select an existing load case record in the table. Load Cases | 495 . or delete load cases. 5 Under Category. click Training Files. 2 Click Add. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select the Load Cases tab. In this table. select Dead Loads. you add or delete load natures. 3 Click Add. you add. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. The second table is the Load Natures table. and rename it to Roof Hung. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.

The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. and double-click View 1 . Hosts include slabs and beams. and wind loads to the model. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. expand 3D Views. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand Views (all). Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. using the project coordinate system. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. In this exercise. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. live loads. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and enter an appropriate name. A host for a load has its own work plane.Analytical. you will be adding dead loads. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496.rvt. and loads can be placed by default. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature.

TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . . select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. click (Area Load). 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. 4 Select . Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click the Model Graphics Style control. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Loads. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. under Analytical Model. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. and click Hidden Line. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar.2 On the View Control Bar.

498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . . click (Area Load). 11 Select the load. click 13 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. expand Structural Plans.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. click Loads. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). expand Views (all). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. 10 On the Design Bar. under Structural Analysis. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project for Orient to.

click Modify to exit the Loads tool.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click OK. select Area Load: Area Load 1. and click Element Properties. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2-Analytical. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. click Loads. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. enter -0. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 .

and click OK. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. click Duplicate. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Wind Load. 13 On the Design Bar. click (Line Load). Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar. as shown. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . and click OK. 19 On the View Control Bar. 21 Select . 18 In the Project Browser.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2 . draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. and click Hidden Line.Analytical in order to view the added loads. click the Model Graphics Style control. and double-click View 1 .Analytical.

click Grid. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

The elevation view opens. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. click Modify. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. click Framing Elevation. 29 Select . 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . and press DELETE. 26 On the Design bar. 27 Select the temporary grid. and will be deleted in a later step.This grid is drawn for reference only.

34 Select the load. and click OK.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 32 On Level 2. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. as shown. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. under Structural Analysis. click . select Workplane for Orient to. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. and on the Options Bar. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Line Load). click Loads.

6. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 6 Under Factor. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 9 Under Factor. Load Combination In this exercise. click Structural Settings.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Load Combination on page 505. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. select DL1. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. 8 Click Add. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. enter 1. Load Combination | 505 . 7 Under Case or Combination. select LL1.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Under Case or Combination. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. enter 1. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. enter DL+LL. and click Add. click the Load Combinations tab. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise.4. 4 Under Name.

25 Under State. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . enter 0. select Ultimate.5. 23 Select Row 2. enter 1. and click Add.3. select Envelope.2. 18 Under Case or Combination. and enter 1. 22 Click on the Load Combination table.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. 14 Under Factor. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. select DL1. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 24 Under Type. 21 Under Case or Combination. 12 Under Name. enter DL+LL+WIND. 20 Under Factor. 15 Under Case or Combination. select LL1. select WIND1. 17 Under Factor. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. and click Add.

Transfer Project Standards | 507 . i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Scroll down the list of items. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. and select Load Types. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select the file that contains the load table.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. click OK. Click Check None. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save.

5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click the Load Combinations tab. click Overwrite. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .■ Click OK.

click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. and creating an analytical schedule. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. expand Structural Plans. expand Views (all). you document the analysis by adding an annotation. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save.The load combinations are displayed. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . and double-click Level 2 Analytical.

5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Modify.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag.

10 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. and click View. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. right-click on the Design Bar. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . 8 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. select Line Loads and click OK. select Fx 1 and click Add. 11 Using the same process. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields.

Analytical. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. double-click Ground Level .rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. For this reason. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F .13 Click OK. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.3. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. under Structural Plans. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. In addition.

and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. 4 Press TAB. 5 Press TAB.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .

setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . You can save the open file if you wish. For example. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. a new training file is provided. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. In the next exercise. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets).Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls.

They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane.rvt. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. click Training Files. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. 3 Click OK. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature.

click . 4 On the Toolbar. . 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Toolbar. click as shown. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . and draw a zoom box around one of the beams.

6 Click the beam. For demo purposes. and on the Option Bar. for Vertical Projection.The dot located at the top of the beam. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and then click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. select Auto-detect. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. and on the Option Bar. click . under Analytical Model. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 8 Click the slab. select Top of Slab. under Analytical Model. for Vertical Projection.

and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. double-click Level 2 . 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. right-click. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. 11 On the Toolbar. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 .The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. The dot located at the top of the slab. click . Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model.Analytical. and click Zoom in Region. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area.

for Horizontal Projection. and on the Option Bar. select the wall. 18 On the Toolbar. The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. The horizontal projection plane for the column. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. under Analytical Model. click . click .14 Click the column. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. select Auto-detect. and then select the column. click (Join Geometry). and then click OK. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. 16 On the Tools toolbar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

select Auto-detect. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. 21 Press TAB. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. and then click OK. 22 On the Option Bar. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. for Horizontal Projection. click . and select Chain of Walls or Lines. under Analytical Model. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned.

right-click. and then click OK. select Plane 1. and click Zoom in Region. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. click . for Horizontal Projection. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click the upper wall. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall.

and click Zoom in Region. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. double-click Section 3. right-click. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

under Analytical Model. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. and on the Option Bar. for Vertical Projection. select Bottom of Slab. and then click OK. select Auto-detect. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. and then click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. and on the Option Bar. 31 Click the lower wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . click . Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. for Top Vertical Projection. click . under Analytical Model.

You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. and on the Option Bar. select Exterior Face. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). click No. under Analytical Model. 36 In the Go to View dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. for Horizontal Projection. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 38 On the Option Bar. double-click Section 3. 42 Click the lower wall. In the Revit dialog. under Analytical Model. click Finish Sketch. click . and then click Open View. for Analytical Slab Edge. click . and on the Option Bar. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 43 In the Element Properties dialog.Analytical. and then click OK. 35 Click the slab. select Auto-detect. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. click .

and on the Option Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and on the Option Bar. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. 46 Click the lower wall. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. click . select Top of Wall. under Analytical Model. for Top Vertical Projection. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall.

50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 49 Enter ZF. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Level 3 .The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line).Analytical. double-click Level 3. 52 On the Toolbar. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Close any additional open windows. click .

■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 .53 Click the beam. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. Extend each end of the beam as shown. 55 In the Level 3 window. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. under Analytical Model. and select the beam shape handle. for Horizontal Projection. select Auto-Detect. . and then click OK. Press TAB. and on the Option Bar.

Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. Boundary Conditions on page 531. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is provided. In the next exercise.

and click Zoom in Region. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. and then click OK. clear Structural Foundation. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions.rvt. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Apply. click Boundary Conditions. double-click View 1 . 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. Boundary Conditions | 531 . 8 On the Options Bar. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. click Training Files. 2 Enter ZF. right-click. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog.Analytical. and for State. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. under Visibility. select Fixed. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. and click Zoom in Region. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. click (Point Boundary Condition). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area.

and then click OK. select Pinned. and select the other symbol. under Structural Analysis. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. press CTRL. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . for State. 14 On the Option Bar. click .12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown.

20 On the Options Bar. select Pinned. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. click . click Boundary Conditions. and draw a zoom box around the foundation. Boundary Conditions | 533 . 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. click (Line Boundary Condition). and for State. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. 18 On the Toolbar.

Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. a new training file is provided. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. are imported back into Revit Structure. including structural plans. All views. For more information. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. In the next exercise. member relocation. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. via an Application Programming Interface (API). elevations. In addition. that you confirm in the analysis software. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. sections. You can save the open file if you wish. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. The application programming interface (API) starts. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. or member addition.

expand 3D Views. 535 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. etc. sheet. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. You can export a 2D view (plan. elevation. section. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. and double-click 3D . you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. or schedule into AutoCAD. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. Finally. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images.Atrium. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. In this tutorial. Revit Structure. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007.). Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. click Training Files.rvt.

select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. ■ ■ Click Options. 4 In the Export Options dialog.dwg). NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under File naming. select a folder on your local computer. The existing file name is automatically shortened. select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. click Short. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). Under Save as type. 3 In the Export dialog. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

and click Open. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. 5 On the Export dialog. 8 Navigate to the file location. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . click Save.■ ■ Under Prefer. Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007.

11 In Revit Structure. click File menu ➤ Save As. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. Revit Structure columns. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. beams. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 9 Select a beam as shown. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member.rvt. the Revit Structure model appears as shown.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 1 In the Project Browser. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. 3 In the Export dialog. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. i_RST_Export-in progress. select a folder on your local computer. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. expand Structural Plans. Under File name.dwg). Under File naming. and double-click Level 2. Under Save as type. Click Save.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.rvt. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports).

8 In Revit Structure. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .rvt. 6 Navigate to the file location. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. i_RST_Export-in progress. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.If the view was set to wireframe. a warning dialog appears. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. and click Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. click Hidden Line Removal. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. On the View’s export mode dialog.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. Select each sheet. Under Export Range. 4 On the Export dialog. Exporting Sheets | 541 . select a folder on your local computer. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. clear Views. and click OK. 2 In the Export dialog. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. click Save.

navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.If the view was set to wireframe. a warning dialog appears. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. If you wish to save the changes. and click Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Hidden Line Removal.

Exporting Sheets | 543 .When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. they appear as shown.

544 .

or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. In this lesson. shape. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. 545 . Using the Family Editor. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. and when and how to use it. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type.rfa extension. In this tutorial. and roofs are examples of these types of families. You also learn about the Family Editor. they are still related and come from a single source. because there is only one file to track. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. Even though various types within a family can look different. material set. thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. The different file types become much easier to manage. For example. exceptions to this rule. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. each with a different size. however. Walls.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. In addition. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . There are. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. such as a curved beam.

while many more are stored in component libraries. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Family templates are either host-based or standalone.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. has wall types that define interior. foundation. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. floors. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. and beam. The basic walls system family. for example. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. and roofs. generic. Host-based families have components that require hosts. and partition wall styles. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. but you cannot create new system families. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. exterior. Standalone families include columns.

so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and also a standalone pile cap family component.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . custom step footing. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. transfer them from one project to another. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. Introduction to Families | 547 .rfa extension. You create in-place families only within the current project. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project.

or 3D. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. In this exercise. In the final exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you learn about the Family Editor. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Load Family command on the File menu. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. if you change the original family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. such as plan. elevation. how to access it. To add a family to your project. you learn when to use the Family Editor. it is saved with the project. how to access it. you can drag it into the document window.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. or you can load it using the Load From Library. However. and when to use it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. In this section. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . After the family has been loaded in the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction.

modify it as needed. open it in the Family Editor. you can click File ➤ Open. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . Within the Windows® environment. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. 5 Finally. and click Open. it will be available within the Type Selector. 9 Save the newly defined family. navigate to a family file.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. you will need a specific component for your design. 3 Next. if you have exhausted your external resources. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. and then load it into the project. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. To start a new family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. it opens within the Family Editor. In this case.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. select the appropriate template. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. If you find a close match. such as newsgroups. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. With Revit Structure open. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. you can double-click any file with an . and click Open. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. When the family opens. presume it is a bay window that you require.

550 .

a custom castellated beam. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. 551 . non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. you create it within the project file.rft file). a custom titleblock. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. In the second exercise. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. not within the Family template (. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. you create a custom.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. In the first exercise. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. and an in-place family for a step-footing. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. When you create an in-place family. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. Using the installed templates.rft) template for use in other projects.

rfa. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. click Training Files. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. right-click. and press DELETE. and click Zoom to Fit. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Click Apply. and then click OK. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.

Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Move the cursor inside the profile. Click the angle. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . and click to place the dimension as shown. click Dimension.

554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. and press ENTER. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. and drag them approximately as shown.13 Select the angled reference plane. and click Zoom to Fit. right-click. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. enter 66. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area.

click Dimension. and press DELETE.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . and add a dimension as shown.

under Other. and then click OK. click Dimension. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. 22 On the Design Bar. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 24 Press ESC. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. select Not a Reference. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. click Ref Plane. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Is Reference. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. click . click . Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar.

30 Select the horizontal reference plane. 31 Select the dimension line. 29 Press ESC. and press ENTER. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. click the dimension. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . and enter 0' 11/32".The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements.

Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 39 Press ESC. 38 Using the split tool. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 36 Click Modify. and click Delete Inner Segment.

under Parameter Data. enter a for Name. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 44 On the Options Bar. enter b for Name.41 On the Options Bar. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. and then click OK. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. under Parameter Data.

Under Other. 51 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. do the following.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. click Label. click Family Types. and select wr. 49 On the Options Bar. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 0' 4 1/2". and OK. for a. ■ Under Other. 47 In the Family Types dialog. for wr. Click Apply. enter 0' 2". click Family Types. 48 Select the dimension as shown. select 2" X 6". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

66 On the Options Bar. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. click the Imperial Library folder. 63 In the Project Browser.rte. and for File Name. enter 0' 5". You are now in sketch mode. and click Save.■ ■ Under Other. 60 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. Under Other. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. for a. click Family Types. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. for b. click Lines. enter 0' 2 1/2". click Finish Sketch. 64 On the Design Bar. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. and enter 2" x 5". 52 On the Toolbar. Click Apply. in the Imperial Templates folder. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). Under Other. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . select Rename. Under Other. double-click Level 2. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. 65 On the Design Bar. select Structural Analysis-Default. for b. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. under Structural Plans. 62 In the New Project dialog. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. Under Family Types. enter 0' 2 1/2". click Browse. enter 0' 2".rfa. Click Apply. do the following. for Sr. click (Rectangle). 68 On the Design Bar. 58 Click File ➤ Save. and click OK. click OK. click Slab. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and then click OK. 57 In the Family Types dialog.

The slab is created. and in the Type Selector. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. under Sections (Building Sections). select Fine. 73 On the View Control toolbar. double-click Section 1. For Detail Level. click Section. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. select Wireframe. For Model Graphic Style. select 1" = 1' 0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 72 Select the slab. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. 71 In the Project Browser. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Layer 3. The file should still be open. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. for Deck profile. The new profile is applied to the slab. click OK. open the file from the saved folder location. 82 In the Project Browser. 76 Select the slab. and on the Options Bar. select Edit for Structure. click Load into Project. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. under Construction. If it is not. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following. click Training Files. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. click OK. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . Under Layers. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. under Sections. If there are multiple files open. and open the new family file. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Click OK. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. click Edit/New. select the slab project from the available files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. select the new metal deck profile file. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. 75 On the Families Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ . Under Structural Deck Properties. double-click Section 1.

b = Length of sloped portion. 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. . click Edit/New. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. dt1 = Tee depth top beam. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and on the Options Bar.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. click castellated beam. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. .

under Construction. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For e2. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. enter 0' 3". For dt2. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rebar Lines. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . click Training Files. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. and then click OK. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. Click Apply. enter 0' 5 1/2". enter 0' 6". For b.rft. For dt1. click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 4".■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam.

4 On the Options Bar. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click ■ (Draw). 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line.

Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Dimension. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown.

for Label. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Press ESC. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select B.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 . for Label. 15 On the Options Bar.13 On the Options Bar. select D. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select C. for Label.

18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select B. enter Square. click OK. for Label. 22 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. click Browse.17 On the Options Bar. select Structural Analysis-Default. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. and click Open. 24 In the New Project dialog. 19 On the Options Bar.rte. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. for Label. for File name. select C. in the Choose Template dialog.

and select Rebar Shape: Square. and be certain that the Square. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. 30 On the Options Bar. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. The slab is created. click Lines. The active rebar shape is highlighted. You are now in Sketch mode. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Families Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. and click OK. click Slab. open the file from the saved folder location. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.27 In the Project Browser. 29 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. The file should still be open. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser.rfa file is open. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. under Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . click Load into Projects. double-click Level 2. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. click (Rectangle). NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. If it is not. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. scroll down the list of available shapes. select the new project.

572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 In the Type Selector. 44 Select the rebar. 40 Hover over the section view. select Detail Level: Fine. for Placement Plane.38 On the Options Bar. 41 Click to place the rebar. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. select Near Cover Reference. select Rebar Bar: #10. 42 Click ESC.

Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . Creating In-Place Families on page 573. 46 On the Design Bar.rft) template. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. click Modify.

select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser.36" x 12". click Foundation ➤ Wall.rvt. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. 4 Click the foundation wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. click Training Files. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

10 On the Design Bar. click Create. and click OK. Make sure the entire footing is selected. and click OK. select Structural Foundations.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and select the bearing footing as shown. 9 In the Name dialog. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. select Pick a plane. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . 12 Press TAB. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown.

for Depth. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter -3' 0". 21 On the Design Bar. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. click Finish Family. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. click Finish Sketch. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. select Concrete . 20 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 22 On the Family Design Bar. click . 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Materials and Finishes. 19 In the Materials dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Extrusion Properties. click the value for Material. 15 On the Options Bar.Cast-in-Place Concrete. and select Multiple.

27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .

578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry).28 Press ESC. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. and click Multiple Join. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . and click Multiple Join. click Modify. click (Join Geometry). 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 40 In the Project Browser.

and click Open.36 x 24. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. click . and labels. and your project data. and enter -1/2" for Offset. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click Lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. 2 In the New dialog. graphics. text. The titleblock has linework. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. select D .rft. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet.

and click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. click . 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to draw a new vertical line. 8 On the Options Bar. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset.Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. . 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown.

and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select the second and third horizontal lines. click Modify. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line.13 On the Design Bar. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Lines. select Wide Lines. enter 3/4" for Offset. and. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. select Title Blocks. 26 On the Design Bar. click . while pressing CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Modify. 17 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar.

2 In the Open dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Import/Link ➤ Image. you add a company logo.jpg. 11 Click OK twice. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/8" for Text Size. under Text. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Duplicate. select Company Logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. text notes. and click Open. and click OK. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 6 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New.The titleblock linework is now complete. click Text. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click . navigate to Training/Common. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. and select Bold.

Press ENTER to add each new line of text. 17 On the Design Bar.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. click Modify. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and select the last text note. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and drag the text note down as shown. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. in the text box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . select Text: Text Note 1. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and add an address and phone number as shown. 18 Select the drag handle.

21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. Add consultant name. and select the consultant text note. address.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. select Constrain and Multiple. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Text. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click .

and click to specify the second copied text note location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. click Duplicate. select Text: 3/16". enter 3/16" for Text Size. click Edit/New. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 3/16" for Name. click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 34 Click OK twice.26 Move the cursor down 4''. under Text. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. and enter Sheet Number. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. and click to specify the first copied text note position. 32 In the Name dialog.

39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. and enter Checked By:. and enter Drawn By:. click Label.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. and enter Date. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. and click to specify the label location. select Project Issue Date. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. click Edit/New.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 Click OK twice. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. enter 3/8" Label for Name. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. click . 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Checked By. 53 In the Name dialog. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . and click OK. enter 3/8" for Text Size. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. click Label. under Text. select Drawn By. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. click Duplicate. 50 On the Options Bar.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Project Number. click Center and Middle. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. select Label: 3/8'' Label. select Sheet Number. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and click to specify the label location.

select Client Name. click Duplicate. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. select Project Name. and click OK. and click OK.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. enter 1/16" for Text Size. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 68 On the Options Bar. 71 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 On the Design Bar. click Left and Middle. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and select any labels that may need to be moved. so that they are all aligned. click Modify. select 1/16” Label. select File Path. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. under Text. and click to specify the label location. click Edit/New. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click . 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Label. Click Modify. 75 On the Options Bar. 73 Click OK twice. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . enter 1/16" Label.

navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. enter Name for Drawn By. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. The titleblock graphics. and then click OK. and labels are now complete. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Training D-Size Titleblock. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa file. under Other. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. and click Open. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. click Sheet. click Modify. select it. 5 In the Open dialog. text. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet.rfa. and click OK. click . you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. click Load. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the titleblock. verify that default.

For Project Number.12 On the Settings menu. For Client Name. 2005. enter January 1. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For Project Status. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . For Project Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter Jane Smith. 14 Click OK. enter 2005-01. click Project Information. enter In Progress. enter Office Building.

594 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. To use the Truss tool. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. 595 . and web members. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. bottom chord. double-click Roof. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select.

7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. click . enter 6' 0". 5 On the Options Bar. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .2 On the View toolbar. 9 On the View toolbar. Click OK. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. for Bearing Chord. click Truss. Under Dimensions. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Under Structural. select Top. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click ■ ■ ■ . click . for Truss Height.

Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. 11 Press DELETE. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. delete the extra flange at column location A1. 12 Using the same method. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown.The truss is placed between the columns.

14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. select Multiple. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click (Copy). under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. 15 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Options bar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser.

click . Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 24 While pressing CTRL. under Structural Plans. click (Copy). 20 On the View toolbar. 25 On the View toolbar. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . double-click Roof. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. click Modify. select the remaining trusses. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 19 On the Design Bar.

and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. click 29 Enter ZF. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 28 On the View toolbar. 27 On the Design Bar. . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 31 In the Type Selector.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. click Truss.

enter 6' 0". click ■ ■ ■ .32 On the Options Bar. do the following: Under Structural. for Bearing Chord. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . Under Dimensions. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. Click OK. 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. for Truss Height. select Top. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.

add trusses between columns C1. 38 On the View toolbar.36 Enter ZF.D4. 37 Using the same method. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and D1. .C4. click 39 Enter ZF.

and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. click shown .

Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs.42 Press DELETE. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. and repeat for the remaining trusses. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. Under Diagonal Webs. Click OK.500. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. for Structural Framing Type. and click OK.rvt. click Truss. a new training file is supplied. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Short Span. 6 In the Name dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. Under Bottom Chords. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . for Angle. for Structural Framing Type.500. You can save the open file if you wish. 44 Using the same method. click . 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. In the next exercise. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. enter Howe Flat Truss . Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. enter 90.

click select the truss as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . 10 On the View toolbar. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . click 14 Enter ZF. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. double-click 3D. 12 Using the same method.Short Span.8 In the Element Properties dialog. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. . The truss changes to the new type. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. click OK. 13 On the View toolbar. .

■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structural Framing Type. under 3D Views. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click Edit/New. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 16 In the Type Selector. Under Diagonal Webs. click . Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 3D. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structural Framing Type. Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Name dialog. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. click Truss.500.Roof Span. . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.500. click OK. and click OK. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. enter Howe Flat Truss . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. 24 On the View toolbar. click select the truss as shown.

select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . . The truss changes to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. change the remaining long trusses to the new type. 26 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . click 28 Enter ZF. 25 In the Type Selector.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange.Roof Span.

draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and then select the truss as shown.rvt. a new training file is supplied. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. In the next exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click . You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. double-click 3D.

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the roof as shown. All instances of the truss will be highlighted. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 .

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click . vertical webs. In the next exercise.The top chords. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. a new training file is supplied. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 8 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Design bar. 9 On the View toolbar. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. click Modify. You can save the open file if you wish. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. 10 On the View Control Bar.

Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 .rft located in the Imperial folder. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. click Training Files. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. click the Training Files icon. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise.

click Truss Top Chord.7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. 8 Using the same method. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown.11 On the Design Bar. Truss Bottom Chord. click Truss Web. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. You are now in the project file. navigate to a folder of your choice.16 Using the same method. click Load into Projects. 19 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. select Family Files (rfa). enter Custom_Truss. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. For Save as type. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. For File name. 17 On the Design Bar. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. and click OK. Click OK.

double-click 3D. 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . under Structural Plans. click Truss. double-click Level 2.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. under 3D Views. 24 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Design Bar. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. select Custom_Truss.

create column grids.rte. You can save the open file if you wish. in the Imperial Templates folder. a new training file is supplied. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you add braces to form the steel truss. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and a framing elevation. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 2 In the New Project dialog. under Structural Plans. select Structural Analysis-Default. and click Open. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Grid. In the next exercise. Finally.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise.

) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. enter 5' 0". click Framing Elevation. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. and place approximately as shown.a. double-click Elevation 1 . under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 Select each grid line. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. and press ENTER. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 . click Structural Column. click Ref Plane. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Click the dimension.

18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. click Ref Plane. and enter 15' 0". Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Press ESC. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. 19 Click the dimension. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. The array is complete. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. click Beam. click . and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point.24 On the Tools toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector. 26 Drag the array to the right. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . 27 Enter 7 for array count. and press ENTER.

click Brace. 33 In the Type Selector. select 3D Snapping. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. . click truss as shown. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. When placing braces. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.30 On the Tools toolbar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. When placing beams. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

click Ref Plane. then select the edge of the top chord as shown. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . 38 On the Tools toolbar.36 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. click . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown.

40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . double-click 3D. under 3D Views. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser.

You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 42 Click File menu ➤ Save.The completed truss is displayed. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.

624 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. At any time in the design process.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. 625 . Using design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.

With the second option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . The client has asked you to create various options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the final exercise of this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP In this exercise. click New. the roof and structure systems must work together. under Option Set. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you can edit it. you design each of the structural options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. each is constructed for interchangeability. each with multiple design options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click Training Files. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.In this particular case. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. therefore. make your final design decision. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials.rvt. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. the only available command is to create a new option set. you set up multiple design option sets. After you create a design option. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In the second exercise. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the first exercise in this lesson.

11 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. In this case. click Modify. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . and double-click ROOF TERRACE. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. add three columns. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and the third column centered between the two. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit Selected. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. expand Views (all). select Round Column: 03" Diameter. click Column.3 Select Option 1 (primary). The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . By selecting Multiple. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. TIP To center the middle column. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. expand Floor Plans. and click Close. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 On the View menu.

TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . using the same technique. A copy of the three selected columns is added. When you are finished. Because of the size of the columns. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.

Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. select Round Bar : 2". 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom in on the upper right column.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Next. double-click TOP OF CORE. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. The first click specifies the beam start point. 19 In the Project Browser. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam. 23 On the Design Bar. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . In it. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.

zoom into the left column. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click 26 On the Options Bar.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. click . and click the center point. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. and click OK. under Option Set. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . 44 Select the option set Roofing and. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). name the option Louvers. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. click New. enter Beam for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 45 Under Roofing. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. and click OK. 46 Under Option. enter Roofing for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. not a new option set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 43 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option Set. click Rename. click New. under Option. enter Brackets for New. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Structure for New. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename.

select Edit Selected. select Beam. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished. Under Now Editing. and click OK. under Floor Plans. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. double-click ROOF TERRACE. you create the second design option. under Structure. 48 Under Option. name the option Sunscreen. click Rename.47 Under Roofing. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration. 53 In the Project Browser. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. select Option 2.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Align. select Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. 56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu.

65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 61 On the Design Bar.60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. name the file. 67 On the Tools menu. i_Urban_House-in progress. you need this file in its current state. click . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 66 On the View toolbar. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . which is visible by default. click Save As. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. and click Save. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 70 On the File menu.rvt. click Finish Editing. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created.

you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you set up multiple design option sets. expand Floor Plans. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. select Rafter 2 x 10. select Louvers (primary). the other for beams. a Louver system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you design each of the roofing options. If you need to add dimensions. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise.rvt. 10 Referring to the following illustration. expand Views (all). each with multiple design options to pick from. open it now. Under Now Editing. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. delete them after the rafter is in place. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. With the second option. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 4 Under Edit. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. click Component. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under Roofing. click Edit Selected. 3 In the Design Options dialog. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The second roofing system. do so now. In the next exercise. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . The dimensions shown are for training purposes. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 6 In the Project Browser. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 2 On the Tools menu.In this exercise. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. The first option. 5 Click Close. 8 In the Type Selector. Sunscreen.

enter 38' 6" for Length. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. and click OK. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 5 for Number. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Select Constrain. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. click . click Array.

638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. For example. TIP When entering a dimension value. you can enter 3 3. The space separates feet and inches. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. and press ENTER. rather than entering 3' 3".

24 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 25 With the louver still selected. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click the Edit menu. and. 20 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and press Enter. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. under Other. click Component. Select 2nd for Move To. click . Enter 34 for Number. and select the louver you just placed. when the listening dimension displays. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 27 For the array starting point. click Modify. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. enter 1’.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Array. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. select Louver 2 x 6.

29 On the View toolbar. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Editing.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. under Edit. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. The louver roof system is complete. click . 31 In the Design Options dialog. 30 On the Tools menu.

select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . and then click Close. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. and the third point defines the arc. select Sunscreen. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 33 Under Editing. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The first two points define the ends of the line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. the top of the next column on the right. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. In this case. click Edit Selected. Click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 40 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations. 43 On the Design Bar. then you can modify it through the dimension. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 39 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Properties. You will fix this in a later step. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click . NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and click OK. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Therefore. under Roofing. 41 Select the top of the left column. click Lines. and double-click West. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.

Under Constraints. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 48 On the Design Bar. click Save. click Finish Editing. 50 On the Tools menu. then the center arc. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 51 In the Design Options dialog. Sunscreen. you designed each of the roofing options. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. In this exercise. The louver roof system is complete. Select the right arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click . 49 On the View toolbar. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. under Edit. 46 On the Tools menu. and then click Close. The first option. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. 52 On the File menu. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. The second roofing system. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. a Louver system. you need this file in its current state. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Trim/Extend.44 In the Element Properties dialog. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Finish Sketch. 45 Click OK.

tertiary. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics.Managing Design Options In this exercise. right-click {3D}. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. you select a design. under Views (all). and click Duplicate. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 7 On the View menu. 2 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Managing Design Options | 643 . After exploring the combinations. under Views (all). 9 Click OK. and delete the discarded design options. under Views (all). do so now. under 3D Views. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. and last options. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. double-click Primary Option. make it part of the building model. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. 5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. secondary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. double-click Secondary Option. and click OK. and click Rename. 11 On the View menu. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and click Rename.

under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. double-click Last Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 19 On the View menu. and click OK. under 3D Views. and click OK. 15 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. Managing Design Options | 645 . Because the client has selected the design option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 24 Under Option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 29 Select Roofing. An alert is displayed. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. select Beam. This was the client choice for structural. click Close.At this point. the beam option becomes part of the model. select Make Primary. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 26 Under Option Set. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. 30 Under Option Set. In this case. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Yes. click Accept Primary. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Yes. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 27 In the alert dialog. double-click Primary Option. 22 On the Tools menu. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 25 Select Structure. The set is deleted. 31 In the alert dialog. since you no longer need them. under Structure. In your design options. click Delete. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client.

made it part of the building model. click Save. you selected a design. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. 35 On the File menu.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

In the final lesson. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. performance. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In these situations. and manage the links throughout the project. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site. You position the building models on the site plan. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. 647 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility.

you open a project in which only site components have been developed. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse. You position the building models on the site.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. One building model is a condominium. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.

click Open. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . 4 On the File menu. and click Properties. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. in the Model Linking folder that you created.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. RELATED See the lesson.rvt. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. however. c_Condo_Complex. c_Townhouse. and save the file there. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Auto . Select c_Site.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. 8 Clear Read-only. click Open. click Training Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Manual . All three files now reside. and click OK. right-click. This option is grayed out. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Otherwise. ■ ■ Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Save As. click Close. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. with write permission. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. 5 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Site. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. select the three files. 2 On the File menu. you can do so.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.■ Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.

Notice the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Floor Plans.■ Click Open. 13 Click Open. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and double-click Level 1. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 10 In the Project Browser. select Auto . 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning. expand Views (all).Origin to Origin. 11 On the File menu.

The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click (Move). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 15 On the Edit toolbar.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. After you select it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 17 For the move endpoint. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The linked model moves as one object. After you specify the location to move to.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model. For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. select Auto . 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and select c_Townhouse. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

23 On the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. In this case. To rotate an object. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . when the vertical line displays. and then click to specify the end of the rotation.

click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point. 30 For the starting point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click (Default 3D View).A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 37 On the View toolbar. click Rotate. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. for Name. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Edit menu. and click OK. under Identity data. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . enter Townhouse A. 34 On the Options Bar. use the Move command to make any adjustments.

After linking the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click Save. click (SteeringWheels). you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. In this exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click and hold Orbit.38 On the File menu. In this exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. do so before continuing. 2 On the SteeringWheels. they were placed too low within the site topography. If you have not completed the previous exercise. When you originally linked the files. In the next exercise.

and then select the plane that you want to align. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you first select the plane you want to align to.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. When using the Align command. In this case. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. click (Align). clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. Click the Revit Links tab. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click to select it. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and click to select the line. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. expand Elevations. To do this. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and double-click South.rvt. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. under Views (all). In the steps that follow. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. when it highlights. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

the schedule lists the total count for each door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 14 On the File menu. and then click OK twice. under Other. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. clear Itemize every instance. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. expand Schedules/Quantities. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Close. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 12 Select Grand totals.8 Click OK. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You have completed this tutorial. click Save. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. right-click Door Schedule. 13 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by.

676 .

Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. footings. and then add new building model elements. braces and footings) to phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In this tutorial. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. complete with schedules. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. ■ ■ 677 . For the client. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. as well as a covered walkway. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. the galleria. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. You create new phases. You create new phases. and create plan views for each phase. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall.Project Phasing 21 In any project. You create and manage 3 project phases. a floor slab. beams. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Using Phasing In this lesson. demolish existing construction. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. Phasing Your Model | 679 . After you assign building elements to phases. You create new phases for the project timeline.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. you create new phase-specific views. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase.

A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. expand Views (all). By default. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. and the Phase Demolished value is None. click Training Files. demo. existing. 4 Click Cancel. As you add new elements to the building model. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .rvt. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. In the Element Properties dialog. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. the current phase linework is displayed as black. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. For example.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Phasing. and double-click Floor. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 6 On the Options Bar. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click . TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. When you create a new structural project. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. or temporary) are visible in this phase.

10 In the Phasing dialog. demo. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify to clear the command. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. Phasing Your Model | 681 . and Phase 2 (north). Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. click After. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. Phase 1 (south). and click OK. With the phase Filter set to Show New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south).7 Click Cancel. and double-click 3D. click the New Construction field. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). is visible in this view. on the Project Phases tab. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). expand 3D Views. 12 Under Insert. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. existing earlier phases.

682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and click Select All Instances. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 21 On the View Control Bar. right-click one of the rectangular footings. and click Hide Object. click Hide/Isolate.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 20 In the drawing area.

select Show All for Phase Filter. under Phasing. select Existing for Phase Created. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. are selected and are displayed in red. This filters out the steelwork. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. as shown. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. click . Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. The continuous footing foundations. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. click . under Phasing. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. 26 On the Options Bar. Phasing Your Model | 683 . and click OK. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. and openings. 29 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Hide/Isolate. 32 Click OK.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. walls. 25 In the Filter dialog.

you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click . 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). 36 In the Element Properties dialog. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). Phase 1 (south) with demolition. the slab. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. the building is displayed as shown. After you create the views. and the footings north of the galleria.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. the walls. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. under Phasing. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. and click OK. Because this is a renovation project. 35 On the Options Bar. it requires separate plan views for the Existing.

In a phase such as Phase 1. right-click Floor. under Floor Plans. right-click Existing. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. demo. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Phasing Your Model | 685 . and click Rename. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. right-click Copy of Existing. Because of this time relationship. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. under Phasing. under Phasing. and click Rename. enter Existing. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. click . This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 48 In the Project Browser. Because this is a phase-specific view. The line style of the new work. select Existing for Phase. 43 In the Rename View dialog. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. and click Duplicate. 41 In the Project Browser. new.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. under Floor Plans. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. shows as black. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. double-click Existing. 50 In the View Properties dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. double click Phase 1 (south). which will include planned demolition. enter Phase 1 (south). and click OK. 42 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 40 Click No. and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. in phase 1. 39 In the Rename View dialog. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline.

click New. under Floor Plans. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click the Phase Filters tab. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select the interior walls one at a time. demo. 56 Click OK. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. new or temporary. Existing. Demo Red. select Overridden.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. 58 In the Phasing dialog. click Filter 1. 64 Click OK twice. The default phase filters are displayed. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. Demolished. under Phasing. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. 61 For the Filter Name. under Demolished. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . it is displayed as a dashed line. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. As you click each wall. and enter Demo Red. In this case. and select Show All for Phase Filter. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. however. 59 In the Phasing dialog. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. New. 60 Under Filter Name. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. you demolish all elements hosted by it. When you demolish the host. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. 53 In the Project Browser. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. double-click Phase 2 (north). and Temporary.

Phase 1 (south). Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. in phase 1. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. click View menu ➤ View Properties. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. the demolished walls are displayed as red. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. Because of this time relationship. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. under 3D Views. and click OK. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. and Show All for Phase Filter. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and click Rename. Phasing Your Model | 687 . which will show both architectural and structural building elements. 71 Name the views Existing. Phase 2 (north). This displays both architectural and structural building elements. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. Because you changed the override. 78 Click OK. shows as black. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 79 In the Project Browser. 68 Click OK.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. select Existing for the Phase value. The line style of the new work. double-click Phase 1 (south). under Phasing. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. under Graphics. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. 76 Under Graphics. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. under Phasing. under Phasing. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. double-click Existing. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 74 In the Element Properties dialog.

you create column. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. framing. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red.84 Click OK. 86 If you wish to save this file. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. In this exercise. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . as well as 2 views of the building model. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. 85 Repeat steps 81 .

Click OK. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Phase 1 for Name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Structural Columns. Click OK. Enter Framing . Enter Columns . and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Length for Then by. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. Click OK. 4 Under Available Fields. select Structural Framing. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.Phase 1 for Name.

right-click the new sheet. enter Phase 1 . click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click the Fields tab. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar.Structural for Name. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. Select Grand totals. click the Fields tab. select Structural Foundations. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . Clear Itemize every instance. Enter Footings . and click New Sheet. click OK. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 14 Under Available Fields. 18 In the Project Browser. Select Grand totals.Phase 1 for Name. expand Sheets (all). 9 Under Available Fields. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Next. select the following fields. Click OK. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. right-click Sheets (all). Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog.

20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . expand Floor Plans. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. and click to place it. and click to place them. 23 On the sheet. 21 Under 3D views. 22 Expand Schedules. and move the column controls to adjust column width. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. select each schedule one at a time. and click to place it.

692 .

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.

Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you specify options that define the model environment. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. add trees to the building site. and then render a final exterior view. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. After you create the perspective view. When you complete these changes. the pad. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

so you can change the render appearance for the material. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. Solid. select Wood . 9 In the Materials dialog. Solid. select the wooden screen wall.Teak.Teak. click Replace. 5 Under Construction. for Structure. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Materials. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . satin-finished teak. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.Teak. 7 Click OK 3 times. click Properties). The Wood .3 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. click Edit. and on the Options Bar.

click <By Category>. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. 13 Click Update Preview. select Concrete . You do not want the medium gloss finish. and on the Options Bar. select Broom Straight. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. click Modify. 18 In the Materials dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the Graphics tab. 16 Under Construction. for Finish. select Satin Varnish. for Structure. but it is the closest material to what you want. which is using a default material. and click OK. click (Element Properties). Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . and click Update Preview. 21 Click OK 4 times. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. for Finish.Cast-in-Place Concrete. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. for the Structure [1] Material value.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. and click . click Edit. and review the material patterns. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. and click OK. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. select the pad.

and click OK. You create a black anodized aluminum material. click Aluminum Anodized Black. Anodized .Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. By selecting this option.Aluminum. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . review the material appearance (color and pattern). and click OK.Black. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Metal . and click OK. click Replace. click (Duplicate). the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. for Name. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. enter Metal .Aluminum. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. 25 In the Materials dialog.

Aluminum. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary.Black. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. select Region. Anodized . You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. for Curtain Wall Mullions. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . (Show Rendering Dialog). The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. . select Metal . 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select the Material value. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. 35 Click OK twice.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. the faster the image renders. mullions.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. and pad). NOTE The smaller the region. 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Under Lighting. For Sun. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. under Display. after the rendering process completes. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. select Medium. select Exterior: Sun only. 44 To display the building model. for Scheme. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.rvt. The higher the quality. click Show the model. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . for Setting. the longer the rendering process will take. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. select Sunlight from top left. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. Several quality settings are available.

rvt. but any type and size can be used. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress. the RPC model is used in the rendering. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE For simplicity.In a later exercise. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. when you render an exterior view of the model. and double-click Site. expand Views (all).

right-click in the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important.30'. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. near the walkway.) 6 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Type Selector. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. as shown. and click Site. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. and place 2 trees in the project. select RPC Tree . similar to the locations shown. click Site Component. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. they can be loaded from the Content Library.Deciduous : Red Maple .

and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees. and on the Options Bar. 13 Click OK twice. select RPC Tree .Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 18'. enter Honey Locust .7 In the Type Selector. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK.25'. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.18'. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. click Rename. for Height.42'. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Rename dialog.Deciduous : Honey Locust . You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. for New. select RPC Tree .

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 705 . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. The perspective view displays. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.3 Zoom out. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. in the Project Browser. Depending on camera placement. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and select the crop boundary. and click Show Camera. under Floor Plans. as shown. double-click Site. With the camera shown. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. If the camera is not shown in the view. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. and adjust the field of vision.

Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. enter Exterior . 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 10 Save the file. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day. double-click Exterior . and click OK. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. under 3D Views.6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser.

and render a daytime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. under 3D Views.rvt.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior .Day. You then duplicate the view.

for New. under Lighting. select Medium. enter Spring Equinox . select Sky: Cloudy. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Under Quality. NOTE If a background image is required. under Background. You create a location and time for the rendering. In this case. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.Santa Monica. 6 Click OK twice. for Setting. for Sun. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. and click Rename. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You adjust cloud settings as required. and click Render.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Spring Equinox. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 3pm. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Edit/New. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 5 In the Rename dialog.

click Show the model. click Export.9 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 10 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. Click Save. After the image is rendered.png). Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . click Desktop. select Portable Network Graphics (*. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the rendering. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.

Night. add 30 :Sconce Light . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. under 3D Views. 16 With the Exterior . and click Move to Group. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Day. select Exterior: Artificial only. To select a sequential list. dialog. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. click New. for Name. click Dialog). select the first light. click New. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. right-click Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. click OK.Night.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . you duplicate the view and change the settings.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . press and hold SHIFT. 22 Using the same method. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. verify that Pool Lights is selected. enter Pool House Lights. under Group Options. for Name.Exterior . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Night view open. and click Artificial Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and click OK. under Lighting. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Scheme.Flat Round : 60W .120V.Day view to Exterior . enter Pool Lights. and select the last light.Flat Round : 60W . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under Group Options.Flat Round : 60W . 25 Using the same method. under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.

29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. In this example. under Image.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Show the model. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. and click OK. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. After the image is rendered. for Exposure Value.

rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. render the views. define the perspective view and rendering settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding RPC People In this exercise.

and on the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Type Selector. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 6 Select the figure. double-click Level 1. Exact placement is not important. click Modify. under Floor Plans. the person’s line of sight. and place the component inside the pool house. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. click Component. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Adding RPC People | 715 . but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. select RPC Female : YinYin.

click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). click Modify.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. for Render Appearance Properties. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 13 On the Design Bar. you can enable this option. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 12 Click OK 3 times. 14 Save the file. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. By default. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Parameters. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 .15 Proceed to the next exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and click OK. under 3D Views.The perspective view displays. under Extents. and click Properties. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 4 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

11 In the 3D view. double-click Level 1. double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

12 In the floor plan view. right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. size the box as shown. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

15 Maximize the 3D view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 17 Save the file. and render the interior view. and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. doors that contain windows or glass. To create a daytime view.

The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. for Setting. and click OK. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Render. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Night. under Lighting. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the Rename View dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. right-click 3D View 1. After these settings are established. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. clear Pool Lights. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Draft. 8 In the Rendering dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. select Interior: Artificial only. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. and click Rename. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. for Scheme. you turn them off for this scene. and click OK. enter Interior . 7 Under Quality.rvt. 4 In the Rendering dialog. You can specify a lower quality. 5 Click Artificial Lights.

The preset schemes are read-only. in order to turn on daylight portals. see the Revit Structure Online Help.Santa Monica. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. for Daylight Portal Options. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. By default they are turned off. You create a view for the interior during the day. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. (Show Rendering Dialog). Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. for Sun. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 13 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. For sunlit interiors. select Edit. select Curtain Walls. 3pm. click Copy To Custom. select Spring Equinox . In this case. select Interior: Sun only. 17 In the Rendering dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Region. click 14 For Setting. you must create a custom setting.Night. right-click Interior . and click Render. for Scheme.9 Close the Rendering dialog.Day. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . For more information on daylight portals. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

enter 1. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. and on the Options Bar. click Adjust Exposure. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. For Saturation. In the next steps. click Properties). 20 In the Rendering dialog. enter 10. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. under Image. Click OK.

Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . select Wood. enter 90. For Width. select Based on wood grain. clear Region. select the crop boundary. 26 Click Update Preview. 23 With the column still selected. click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). select Printer. for Resolution. As size and DPI are increased. For Amount. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 24 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the drawing area. click (Show Rendering Dialog). under Output Settings. 29 In the Rendering dialog. select High. select Unfinished. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Rotate. add a bump map to create texture. enter 5''. and click OK. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. the render time increases significantly.6. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish.22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. for Setting. You change the varnish setting. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Click OK. For Bump. click the dimensions for Size. and on the Options Bar. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. and click Render.

You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. or section view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Usually. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. independent of the Revit Structure software. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. The walkthrough path is a spline.The rendered image displays. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. elevation. In a plan view. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. and change unit formats as desired.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Training Files. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. If you prefer to use metric values. right-click in the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected. click Walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . and double-click 1st Floor.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. for Width. 11 Under Change. and click OK. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 14 Click . on the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). select the crop boundary. 17 Click . and for Height. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 1. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click the dimensions for Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 .8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. verify that Field of view is selected. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 9''. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Frame. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 16''. 12 On the View menu.

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Floor Plans. under Extents. double-click 1st Floor. click (Element Properties).The walkthrough plays. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. clear Far Clip Active. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. c_Townhouse. press ESC. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. proceed to the next exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . and drag it to the location shown. select Path.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position.

select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. shading with edges. 3 Under Format. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. for Compressor. for Frames/sec. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. select <Shading>. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. and click OK. shading. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . specifying the number of frames. click Edit Walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. . The walkthrough is recorded. for Model Graphics Style. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt. When you export the walkthrough. or rendering. without opening Revit Structure 2009. under Walkthroughs. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click OK. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. reducing the size of the image. and save the exercise file with a unique name. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click Save. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 9 To play the walkthrough. c_Townhouse. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. enter 15. hidden line. click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Output Length. on the Options Bar.

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In this tutorial. you learn to create several different types of roofs.Roofs 23 In this lesson. In this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. In this lesson. You do not need to create the work plane. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 733 . including hip. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. shed. and low sloped roofs. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. mansard. you learn how to add fascia. gable. gutters. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In addition.

and open Imperial\i_Roofs. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. select Name. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click OK. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. expand Floor Plans. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Training Files.rvt. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and double-click Level 1.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. and so on). centerline. click the blue square on the witness line.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 16 On the View toolbar. click Lines. select Chain.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 17 On the Tools toolbar. expand Views (all). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click Modify. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 21 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Type 1). 19 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. and select the second wall. press CTRL. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . 18 Select the edge of the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. press TAB. Next. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

24 On the Options Bar. click model. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar.

rvt. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. i_Roofs. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. and double-click Garage Roof. click Pick Walls. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and click Yes. expand Floor Plans.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . expand Views (all). the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed.

7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click the model. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Modify. select both slope definition lines. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. By default. and click OK. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. click (Properties). 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. under Dimensions. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. clear Defines slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. 14 When you see the informational dialog. and on the Options Bar. 11 Press CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. When you complete the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. expand Views (all). 6 Click to select all the walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Next.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. sketch the chimney opening. i_Roofs. press TAB. clear Defines slope.

11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 9 Using automatic snaps. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Lines. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 10 On the View menu. click Finish Roof. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Defines Slope. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 18 On the View toolbar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. add new slope lines to the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options bar.

you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Next. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. close the roof sketch. select Defines slope. 7 On the Options Bar.rvt. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. i_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743.19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). click Lines. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 14 Under Constraints. click Finish Roof. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 11 To trim the first line segment. click (Trim/Extend). and click OK. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. using the following illustration for guidance. raise the roof 2' above the current level.

) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click Modify. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.16 On the View toolbar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). 18 On the Design Bar.

rvt. i_Roofs. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.

4 On the Options Bar. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 10 To trim the first line segment. and double-click Level 2. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Trim/Extend). Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. 8 On the Tools toolbar. expand Floor Plans. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. you add a slope-defining line. 6 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls.1 In the Project Browser. press TAB. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all).

click Modify. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D. select Defines slope. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click 20 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 13 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. i_Roofs. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748.rvt. and press ENTER. and double-click Level 2. 19 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. 16 Under Constraints. expand Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.

8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.5 On the View menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . clear Defines Slope. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click (Pick Lines). click Slope Arrow. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. click Split Walls and Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. add two new slope arrows. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.15 to add the second slope arrow. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Modify. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to add two reference planes. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Next. 11 On the Design Bar. Next. 9 On the Tools menu. To help locate the position of each split. Before you can add slope arrows.

4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). expand Views (all). click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. on the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. and click OK. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click Edit. under Dimensions. i_Roofs. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Press CTRL.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 12'' for Rise/12". When you sketch a hip roof. enter 6'' for Rise/12". and double-click Garage Roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). 20 Under Dimensions. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. select Defines Slope. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. The eave lines display with a dimension. (Properties). 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 3 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. select both slope arrows. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. and move the cursor to place the arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model.rvt. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. select Slope for Specify. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and then click OK. When eave heights differ. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Align Eaves. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.

12 On the Design Bar. click Save As. click Finish Roof.rvt. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 14 If you want to save your changes. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select a method to align the eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Training Files. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Next. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof.

6 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and double-click North. expand Views (all). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 7 In the Project Browser. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Modify. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. under Constraints. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.1 In the Project Browser. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. (Properties). and double-click Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 3 Select the roof and. Next. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Views (all).

Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. and click OK. and then select Defines slope. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click . under Dimensions. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 On the View toolbar. on the File menu. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the remaining three lines.10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . click mansard roof. press TAB. click Modify.

you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 3 On the Design Bar. After you add the roof. click Training Files. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a roof to a building shell. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click Pick Walls.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click (Trim/Extend). select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.4 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 5 In the drawing area. Because the walls are not continuous. 7 On the Tools toolbar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.

double-click the section head to open the section view. click Roof Properties.EPDM. and click OK. for Type. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar. select Steel Truss .Insulation on Metal Deck .

18 Move the cursor down. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. In the next steps. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. double-click Roof. 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. click (Draw Split Lines). Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.The roof has been created. and click to select it.

and select a point on the opposite roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. on the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. (Add points). The roof is now divided into 6 sections.You create a split line vertically down the center. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 20 Using the same method. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Next. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.

Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually. 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. enter -2''. and press ENTER. for the dimension.In this exercise.

including the interior edges of the roof regions. 27 Press and hold CTRL. 29 On the Design Bar. and select all of the roof edges. click Modify. enter 4''. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Modify Sub-Elements). as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. for Elevation.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar.

The slab has not responded exactly as intended. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 35 Click OK 3 times. for Structure. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. under Construction. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The entire slab is sloped. By making the insulation layer variable. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 36 View the results in the section view. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. select Variable.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. for the Thermal/Air Layer. click Edit. 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click (Properties). double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing.

rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 5 On the Options Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. click (Properties). you can easily create its fascia. and soffits. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center.rfa. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. you learn how to create roof fascia. Creating Fascia. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and Soffits In this lesson. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. select Fascia-Built-Up. gutters. Gutters. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 3 Press CTRL. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. After you create a roof. Creating Fascia. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits in Revit Structure. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and Soffits on page 762. gutters. and click Open.rvt. Gutters. on the File menu. click Training Files.

Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 8 In the Name dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. under Construction. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 764. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. enter Built-up Fascia. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile.7 In the Type Properties dialog.

c_Condominium. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Construction. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.rvt. click Duplicate. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK three times. and click OK.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 3 In the Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. . you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click (Properties). click in the Value field for Material.

you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Views. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Roof. Creating Soffits | 765 .11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits on page 765. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.

6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. 8 Select the roof. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch. and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry. expand Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar.

on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. Creating Soffits | 767 . and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes.

768 .

Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. place. For example. You can also nest groups within other groups. you not only simplify their placement. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Modifying. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. the host group is also updated automatically. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you also simplify the modification process. or with those working on a different project. In another exercise. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. After you create a model group.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. In this tutorial. 769 . hotel rooms. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. When you make changes to a nested group. In this exercise. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. By grouping objects. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and typical office layouts. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and modify repetitive units. You mirror one instance of the group. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating.

expand Floor Plans. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Training Files. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click in the drawing area. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR. and double-click First Floor. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. expand Views (all).

and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Model. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy.

Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and one rotated.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modifying a Group | 777 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save. press TAB to highlight the wall. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click to select it. When you finish editing. click Save As.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.

778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). press TAB. press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member.).). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. select the element.).3 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door. 8 On the Design Bar.

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 On the Options Bar. click Wall. 12 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. click Modify. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. click Door. move the cursor to the left.

In edit group mode. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.16 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. move the cursor up. 22 In the drawing area. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 On the Options Bar.

When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 7'. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. click Finish. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.24 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups In this exercise. created in an earlier lesson. enter 3' 4''. for Unconnected Height. 25 Select the opening. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click 27 For Base Offset. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click Modify. which acts as the host. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and on the Options Bar. (Element Properties). and click OK. 28 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. Nesting Groups | 781 .

3 On the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. in the Project Browser. click (Add to Group).rvt. 4 On the group editor toolbar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Edit Group. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the Typical Kitchen group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. 5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.

select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 783 . 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.

You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as text.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as door and window tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to a group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.

7 On the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region.

Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and select the text note and the filled region. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. as shown. click (Group). and on the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. enter Elevator Lobby Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add an arc leader. 9 On the Options Bar. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 In the drawing area. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

21 In the drawing area. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail. and click Create Instance. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Groups. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor.

draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Tag ➤ By Category. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. clear Leader. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. as shown.manner that a drawing component can be added. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar.

click (Group). under Floor Plans. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 8 In the Filter dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click Check None. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Door Tags.

Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Place Detail. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Modify.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. therefore. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 14 On the Options Bar. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects.

click Desktop. click OK. accept the default template file. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. and expand Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). expand Groups. select 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. A warning dialog displays. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. In this case. and click OK. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. verify that Same as group name is selected. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Create Instance. verify that Project is selected.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Save Group. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups\Model. 3 For File name. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. and click Save. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. for Create new. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Open. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.

or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. When a group is converted to a link. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and on the Options Bar. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the linked Revit model. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click OK. 20 On the Options Bar.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Link. click Modify. click Bind. 18 In the Project Browser. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Use Existing. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. expand Revit Links. 24 In the message dialog.rvt. 17 On the Design Bar. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Remove Link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful